turning programming manual

CNC-Simulator Turning

with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle

Programmer's Guide

Version 6.07

Mathematisch Technische Software - Entwicklung GmbH

Kaiserin-Augusta-Allee 101 D � 10553 Berlin � ( +49 / 30 / 34 99 600

Programmer's GuideCNC Simulator for TurningVersion6.7

© MTS Mathematisch Technische Software-Entwicklung GmbHKaiserin-Augusta-Allee 101 � D-10553 Berlin( + 49 / 30 / 34 99 600 � Fax +49 / 30 / 34 99 60 25eMail: [email protected] � WWW: http://www:mts-cnc.comBerlin, May 1995ofp, June 1998 akss, ofp, July 1998 BM;

All rights reserved, including photomechanical reproduction and storage on electronic media.

DIN (Deutsche Industrie Norm), is the German Standard Specification as defined by the "Deutsches Institut für Normung e. V."MS-DOS is a trademark of Microsoft CorporationPAL is short for "Prüfungs- Aufgaben und Lehrmittelentwicklungsstelle" (Institute for the Development of Examination Standards andTraining Aids), a division of the "IHK Mittlerer Neckar" (Chamber of Industry and Commerce of the Middle-Neckar Region)

Contents

© MTS GmbH 1998 3

Table of Contents

0 Introduction.....................................................................................................................9

0.1 CNC Simulator Turning with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle ...........................................................10

0.2 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x ......................................................................................11

1 Basic Geometry ............................................................................................................13

1.1 The Coordinate System.........................................................................................................................13

1.2 Reference Points ...................................................................................................................................15

1.3 Absolute Dimensioning, Incremental Dimensioning ..............................................................................17

1.4 Tool Geometry.......................................................................................................................................191.4.1 Compensation Value Storage .......................................................................................................211.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation TNC .....................................................................................................23

2 Introduction into NC Programming.............................................................................25

2.1 Structure of an NC Block (Format) ........................................................................................................25

2.2 Modal Commands and Non-modal Commands ....................................................................................26

2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses.......................................................................................27

3 Miscellaneous Functions (M-Functions) ....................................................................28

3.1 Activate/Deactivate Spindle ...................................................................................................................28

3.2 Coolant ..................................................................................................................................................28

3.3 Programmed Halt ..................................................................................................................................28

3.4 Program End .........................................................................................................................................29

3.5 Lock / Unlock Centre Sleeve .................................................................................................................29

3.6 Feedrate ................................................................................................................................................29

3.7 Spindle Speed .......................................................................................................................................29

3.8 Tool Change ..........................................................................................................................................30

4 Programming Commands in Compliance with DIN 66025........................................31

4.1 Rapid Traverse G00 ..............................................................................................................................33

4.2 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01.......................................................................................35

4.3 Clockwise Circular Interpolation G02 ....................................................................................................36

4.4 Circular Interpolation Counter-Clockwise G03 ......................................................................................37

4.5 Dwell G04 ..............................................................................................................................................38

4.6 polygonal machining G08 ......................................................................................................................38

4.7 In-Position Programming (Deceleration) G09 .......................................................................................39

4.8 Inch Data Input G20 ..............................................................................................................................40

4.9 Metric Data Input (mm) G21..................................................................................................................41

Contents

4 Programmer's Guide for CNC Turning, Version 6.07

4.10 Invocation of a Subprogram G22........................................................................................................ 43

4.11 Repeated Program Parts G23 ............................................................................................................ 44

4.12 Unconditional Jump G24..................................................................................................................... 45

4.13 Move to the Reference Point G25....................................................................................................... 46

4.14 Move to the Tool-Changing Position G26 ........................................................................................... 47

4.15 Positioning the Tailstock G28 ............................................................................................................. 48

4.16 Thread Cutting G33 (Chasing Cycle).................................................................................................. 50

4.17 Tool Nose Compensation G41 / G42.................................................................................................. 52

4.18 Cancel Tool Nose Compensation G40 ............................................................................................... 52

4.19 In Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position G48....................................................................... 53

4.20 Description of a Final Contour G51..................................................................................................... 55

4.21 Define Workpiece Zero - Absolute: G54 - G56 and G58.................................................................... 57

4.22 Incremental Zero Shift G59................................................................................................................. 59

4.23 Cancel Incremental Zero Shift G53 .................................................................................................... 60

4.24 Activate Absolute Dimensions G90..................................................................................................... 61

4.25 Activate Incremental Dimensions G91................................................................................................ 62

4.26 Spindle Speed Limitation G92 ............................................................................................................ 63

4.27 Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute) G94 ............................................................................................... 64

4.28 Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution) G95......................................................................................... 65

4.29 Constant Cutting Speed G96 .............................................................................................................. 66

4.30 Cancel Constant Cutting Speed G97.................................................................................................. 66

5 Cycles ............................................................................................................................67

5.1 Complete Table of Available Cycles ..................................................................................................... 67

5.2 Threading Cycle G31 ............................................................................................................................ 69

5.3 Travel Range Limitation G36 for Multipass Cycles ............................................................................... 72

5.4 Finishing Allowance G57 ...................................................................................................................... 73

5.5 Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G75 ........................................................................... 77

5.6 Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G76 .............................................................................. 79

5.7 Clearance Cutting Cycle: G78 .............................................................................................................. 81

5.8 Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 76................................................................................ 85

5.9 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides G79 ................................................... 87

5.10 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour G81.................................................................................... 88

5.11 Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour G82..................................................................................... 98

5.12 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80 .................................................................................. 107

5.13 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle G83............................................................................................. 111

5.14 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles G36 ........................................................................... 113

5.15 Deep Drilling Cycle G84.................................................................................................................... 115

5.16 Clearance Cutting Cycle G85 ........................................................................................................... 117

5.17 Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76 ................................................................................... 121

5.18 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses G86................................................................................ 123

Contents

© MTS GmbH 1998 5

5.19 Recessing Cycle for any Contour G87 ..............................................................................................124

5.20 Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88...............................................................................................................131

5.21 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) G89 ......................................................................135

6 Segment Contour Programming ...............................................................................142

6.1 G-Functions for Contour String Programming.....................................................................................142

6.2 Additional Addresses...........................................................................................................................1466.2.1 Circle Centres Absolute...............................................................................................................1476.2.2 Tangential Transitions .................................................................................................................1486.2.3 Selection of Solutions ..................................................................................................................151

6.3 Rounding between Two Entities ..........................................................................................................1576.3.1 Chamfer between Two Lines.......................................................................................................159

6.4 Two-Point String: Straight Line G71 ....................................................................................................160

6.5 Two-Point String: Arc G72/G73..........................................................................................................162

6.6 Three-Point String: Line - Line G71G71.............................................................................................166

6.7 Three-Point String: Arc - Line G72G71 or G73G71 ............................................................................170

6.8 Three-Point String: Line - Arc G71G72 or G71G73 ...........................................................................176

6.9 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc G72G72 or G72G73 or G73G72 or G73G73........................................183

6.10 Four-Point String:with Tangential Transitions....................................................................................188

6.11 Open Contour Strings........................................................................................................................194

6.12 Tangential Connection.......................................................................................................................201

7 Parameters ..................................................................................................................205

8 Programming with Special Characters.....................................................................207

8.1 Comments ...........................................................................................................................................207

8.2 Skipping of NC blocks .........................................................................................................................207

8.3 Temporary Free Format ......................................................................................................................209

8.4 Arithmetic Operations..........................................................................................................................209

8.5 Example of Programming with Parameters and Arithmetic Operations..............................................213

9 Setup Form..................................................................................................................215

9.1 Preface ................................................................................................................................................215

9.2 Syntax of the Setup Form....................................................................................................................217

9.3 Setup Data: Beginning/End Indicator...................................................................................................218

9.4 Setup Data: Configuration Files...........................................................................................................218

9.5 Setup Data: Blank................................................................................................................................219

9.6 Setup Data: Prefabricated Part............................................................................................................221

9.7 Setup Data: Clamping Devices............................................................................................................222

9.8 Setup Data: Clamping Mode ...............................................................................................................223

9.9 Setup Data: Tailstock/Sleeve ..............................................................................................................224

9.10 Setup Data: Chucking Depth .............................................................................................................224

Contents


9.11 Setup Data: Counter Spindle ............................................................................................................ 225

9.12 Setup Data: Current Tool .................................................................................................................. 226

9.13 Setup Data: Tools in the Turret......................................................................................................... 226

9.14 Setup Data: Driven Tools.................................................................................................................. 227

9.15 Setup Data: Compensation Values................................................................................................... 230

10 NC Program Analysis ...............................................................................................231

11 3D-View .....................................................................................................................233

12 CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle .................................................................. 235

12.1 Preface.............................................................................................................................................. 235

12.2 Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 237

12.3 Programming the Counter Spindle ................................................................................................... 23812.3.1 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle G29 ........................................................................... 23812.3.2 Work Part Transfer G30 ........................................................................................................... 23912.3.3 Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point (when Programming TravelMovements) G59 ................................................................................................................................. 24012.3.4 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid Speed Movement G00.............................. 24112.3.5 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F in mm/min G01.................................. 24212.3.6 Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point G27................................................. 24312.3.7 Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle G28............................................................... 24412.3.8 Bar feed for work parts in the main spindle G05 ...................................................................... 246

13 CNC Turning with Driven Tools...............................................................................247

13.1 Preface.............................................................................................................................................. 247

13.2 Configuration..................................................................................................................................... 251

13.3 Turning Plane G14............................................................................................................................ 252

13.4 Standard Plane G15 ......................................................................................................................... 253

13.5 Free-definable Plane G16................................................................................................................. 254

13.6 Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16 .......................................................... 259

13.7 Machining Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 .......................................................................... 26213.7.1 Face Milling Cycle G60 ............................................................................................................. 26213.7.2 Drilling Cycle G61 ..................................................................................................................... 26413.7.3 Thread Tapping G62................................................................................................................. 26513.7.4 Reaming/Boring G63 ................................................................................................................ 26613.7.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64...................................................................................................... 26713.7.6 Circular Pocket G65.................................................................................................................. 26813.7.7 Tapping G66 ............................................................................................................................. 269

13.8 Multiple Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16 .............................................................................. 27013.8.1 Cycle on a Circle G67 ............................................................................................................... 27013.8.2 Cycle on a Radius G68 ............................................................................................................. 27113.8.3 Cycle at a Point G69 ................................................................................................................. 272

13.9 Front Face G17................................................................................................................................. 27313.9.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates G10.................................................................. 27413.9.2 Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates G11.......................................................................... 27513.9.3 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise G12 ......................................................... 27613.9.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13 ............................................. 277

13.10 Machining Cycles in the Front Face G17........................................................................................ 278

Contents

© MTS GmbH 1998 7

13.10.1 Drilling Cycle G61 ....................................................................................................................27813.10.2 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................27913.10.3 Reaming/Boring G63...............................................................................................................28013.10.4 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................28113.10.5 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................28213.10.6 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................283

13.11 Multiple Cycles in the Front Face G17.............................................................................................28413.11.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................28413.11.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................28513.11.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................286

13.12 Shell Surface - G18 .........................................................................................................................28713.12.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates G10............................................................28913.12.2 Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates G11....................................................29013.12.3 Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise G12 ...................................................29113.12.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise G13............................................292

13.13 Machining Cycles in the Shell Surface G18.....................................................................................29313.13.1 Drilling cycle G61.....................................................................................................................29313.13.2 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................29413.13.3 Reaming/Boring G63...............................................................................................................29513.13.4 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................29613.13.5 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................29713.13.6 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................298

13.14 Multiple Cycles in the Shell Surface G18.........................................................................................29913.14.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................29913.14.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................30013.14.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................301

13.15 Chord Surface G19..........................................................................................................................302

13.16 Machining Cycles in the Chord Surface G19...................................................................................30413.16.1 Plane Milling Cycle G60...........................................................................................................30413.16.2 Drilling Cycle G61 ....................................................................................................................30613.16.3 Thread Cutting G62.................................................................................................................30713.16.4 Reaming/Boring G63...............................................................................................................30813.16.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64 ....................................................................................................30913.16.6 Circular Pocket G65 ................................................................................................................31013.16.7 Tapping G66............................................................................................................................311

13.17 Multiple Cycles in the Chord Face ...................................................................................................31213.17.1 Cycle on a Circle G67..............................................................................................................31213.17.2 Cycle on a Radius G68............................................................................................................31313.17.3 Cycle at a Point G69................................................................................................................314

Appendix : Table of Programmable Addresses ..........................................................315

Index ...........................................................................................................................................................318

Introduction

© MTS GmbH 1998 9

0 Introduction

Dear user of the MTS CNC Simulator Turning 6,

To make CNC Software for training and production means for us to followcarefully the development of CNC machines and controls all the time.

With the target to give you an up-to-date product for the CNC programming ofmachining processes with five controllable NC axes, driven tools and counterspindle the MTS CNC Simulator is being constantly further developed andupdated.

These further developments are released as a new software version withcorresponding modifications of operating and programming manuals.

MTS Mathematisch Technische Software-Entwicklung GmbH

Regarding this edition This Programmer's Guide explains all available NC commands of the MTSProgramming Code. In addition to the DIN 66025 commands, the programming ofmachining cycles and segment contour programming are explained. The MTSProgramming Code is non-proprietary, i.e. not any specific to any onemanufacturer's CNC control system.

The Programmer's Guide is structured as follows:

This Programmer's Guide explains all available NC commands of the MTSProgramming Code. In addition to the DIN 66025 commands, the programming ofmachining cycles, segment contour programming, the programming of the counterspindle and driven tools are explained.

The MTS Programming Code is non-proprietary, i.e. not any specific to any onemanufacturer's CNC control system.

The Programmer's Guide is structured as follows:

Part One presents and explains the basic techniques of NC programming.

Part Two, which is far more extensive, explains all commands which are part of theMTS programming code. For reasons of clarity these have been arranged in threemain sections:

- DIN Commands- Machining Cycles- Segment Contour Programming (Contour Strings)- Counter Spindle- Driven Tools

This structure is intended to provide an easy introduction to NC programming evenfor the unskilled user. The expert programmer may use the clearly structured listingof commands as a quick-reference manual when confronted with complicatedtasks.

The general idea of the Programmer's Guide is to provide the user withexplanations and support as he becomes familiar with manual programming. Allmandatory and optional parameters are explained using NC Blocks and graphicallyrepresented.

Introduction


0.1 CNC Simulator Turning with Driven Tools and Counter Spindle

Complete Machining The re-developed version 6 of the CNC system turning expands the performanceof the MTS CNC Simulator. In addition to improved programming of rotationsymmetrical machining it is possible to create and simulate easily NC programs forcomplete machining with driven tools and a counter spindle. Both of the newmodules are optionally available to the new basic version of CNC Turning 6.

5 Controllable NC

Axis:

X, Z, C, Y, B

For the realization of complex machining tasks 5 controllable NC axes and driventools are available. It is possible to position the C axis exactly and to interpolate it,for instance, to generate geometries by overlaying tool movements. The turret canadditionally be moved in the Y axis and rotated in the B axis.

Counter Spindle To support rear side machining a special free-configurable counter spindle hasbeen realized on a track of its own for the work part take-over. Counter spindle andturret can be configured alternatively. For machining on counter spindle acomplete programming code including the application of driven tools is available.

2D- and 3D-Repre-

sentation in

Multiple Windows

Technique

The dynamic simulation of machining with driven tools is carried out in the CNCSimulator Turning in multiple windows technique enabling both 2D as well as 3Drepresentations of the machining process. Hereby the contour of the work partbeing machined is being constantly updated.

Screen Layout in

CNC Simulator 6

Turning during

Machining with

Driven Tools

When machining with driven tools the following four windows are represented onthe screen:

1 Longitudinal section as a full section on X, Z plane based onthe current C axis (so-called C cut). The view can be shiftedand zoomed as desired. The window 2 is always representedin the same scale as the window 1.

2 Section cut as a full section on X, Y plane. The Z coordinate ofthe section can be selected in window 1.

3 Free-definable view of a work part or of the whole work spaceof the CNC turning machine corresponding to window 1.

4 3D machining view. Distance and viewing angle in relation tothe work space can be changed as desired.

3

21

4

Introduction

© MTS GmbH 1998 11

3D-Collision

Monitoring

During machining processes with driven tools collision monitoring is carried out in3D window. It considers the clamping device, the non-cutting parts of the tool(shaft, take-over, turret) as well as the cutting part of the tool during rapid speedmovement of the tool.

NC Data Analysis The CNC Simulator Turning 6 offers as an effective function the possibility toacquire production-relevant technology information during the simulation of an NCprogram.

In the programming analysis of rotation-symmetrical machining the work phasesare represented as machining paths for each tool and the correspondingtechnology data is acquired. After the analysis the following data referring to thework phases is available as a table: machining diameter area, RPM, cutting speed,feed-in, path, feed-in rate, rapid transfer speed, tool change time, cut volume, cutmass. The analyzed data can be stored in the current NC program where it iscorrespondingly available for further evaluation.

0.2 Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x

Change of

Address Letter

Due to the application of the address letter C for the programming of the C axis itwas necessary to change the address letters.

Old: New:

C

(Chamfer, Radius)

ðð R Address letter for programming ofchamfers and radii

R

(Parameter identification letter)

ðð P Address letter for programming ofparameters

P

(Block number, alternative)

ðð O Address letter for programming of blocknumbers and choice of alternatives

C Positionable turning axis

Y Additional feed axis for the turret

B Additional swivel rotation axis for the turret(depending on machine configuration andof the current machining plane)

Exception: During contour programming ofG72/G73 B remains circle radius.

Summary of some

G-commands

When uniforming MTS syntax some of the commands were put together:The previous cycles G87 (radius) and G88 (chamfer) were put together to G88.This cycle can generate both radii and chamfers.

The previous cycles G65 (straight roughing cycle, conical contour) and G66 (planeroughing cycle, conical contour) are replaced by the cycle G89.

Some new G

commands as

syntax extension

To extend the performance of MTS syntax for the NC programming of rotation-symmetrical machining additional addresses were included in some G commands.

The parameters of the cycles G81 (straight roughing cycle of any contour) and G82(plane roughing cycle of any contour) were extended. The parameters E, A, O andQ have been added.

1. Basic Geometry


Examples P : X= 20, Y= 30

P : X=-20, Y= 15

P : X= 40, Y=-25

Diagram 1.1 : Cartesian Coordinate System

Angles of holes on a divided circle Determination of a point by the length L andthe angle A

Diagram 1.2 Diagram 1.3

Two-dimensional coordinate system for NCprogramming for turning

Diagram 1.4

1.1 Coordinate System

© MTS GmbH 1998 13

1 Basic Geometry

In this chapter we outline the basic mathematical and technical knowledge, asrequired for NC programming.

1.1 The Coordinate System

An important part of an NC program is the description of tool motions (distances)and their target points. To ensure correct execution of such commands, theappropriate geometric dimensions must be precisely defined, so as to effect thecorresponding tool movement on the machine tool. It follows that a referencesystem must be determined, within which the position of each desired point can bespecified. This is called a coordinate system.

Origin of the

Coordinate System

The coordinate system is composed of two axes at a right angle; each axis isscaled, so that numeral values can be marked off on it. The intersection point of thetwo axes is the origin (or zero point) of the coordinate system. As a rule thehorizontal axis is designated as the X axis, the vertical axis as the Y axis.

The coordinate system used for turning is different in that the horizontal axis isdesignated as Z and the vertical axis is designated as X.

A plane coordinate system of this type is called a cartesian coordinate system.

Coordinates A coordinate system serves to definitely locate each point, by specifying itscoordinates (in numeral values) on the X and Y axes.

Example:(see Diagram 1.1)

The coordinates of point P1 are:

X = 20 and Y = 30,

i.e. the location of the point is defined by marking off (from the origin) the value 20in the positive direction X and the value 30 in the positive direction Y.

Accordingly the coordinates of points P2 and P3 are as follows:

P2: X=-20, Y=15 P3: X=40, Y=-25

Polar

Coordinate System

In addition to the cartesian system, polar coordinates are used, e.g. in cases wherea large number of angle dimensions must be programmed.

Example:Pattern of drilled holes on a circle (see Diagram 1.2)

Polar coordinates are used to define the points on a plane by specifying:

the length L and the angle A

Coordinate System

for CNC Turning

A two-dimensional coordinate system is used for turning. The Z-coordinate ismarked off on the horizontal axis, the diameter X is set on the vertical (half) axis(see Diagram 1.4).

1. Basic Geometry


Diagram 1.5 : Position and graphic symbols denoting the reference points of a CNC lathe

Diagram 1.6 : The dimensioning is dependent on the location of the workpiece zero.

Preaxial machining

Postaxial machining

Diagram 1.7 : The coordinate system is dependent on the tool position

1.2 Reference Points

© MTS GmbH 1998 15

1.2 Reference Points

To ensure that the control system of the machine will read the specified coordinatescorrectly and effect the corresponding movements of the tool slide, the machinetool has its own "coordinate system", which is called a "reference system". Thefollowing reference points are part of this system (see Diagram 1.5):

Machine Zero The origin of the reference system is called the machine zero (or datum). It isdefined by the manufacturer and cannot be modified.

Reference Point A point within the travel range of the turret reference point is determined as thereference point to which the coordinate systems of the slide axes relate. Withlathes using an incremental system of coordinates, the tool must be moved to thereference point after each startup of the machine. When absolute measuringsystems are employed, it is not necessary to move it to the reference point. Theappropriate type of machine can be determined in the configuration program (cf.Configuration Manual).

Tool Reference Point All tool slide movements executed by the control system, according to the specifiedcoordinates, will relate to the tool reference point, which is situated on the frontface of the tool mounting. To compute the target position of the tool tip, the controlsystem needs to be informed of the tool compensation value, denoting thedistance between the tool reference point and the tool nose. From these differentialvalues the system will compute the distances to the target point. (cf. Section 1.4:Tool Geometry - Compensation Values).

Workpiece Zero The workpiece zero, as related to the machine zero, can be determined at will. It isadvisable, however, to define the workpiece zero as identical to the origin (zeropoint of the coordinate system) of the workpiece design drawing - in this way thedimensions can be read in directly from the drawing.

FIf the workpiece zero is located on the right front face of the workpiece

(see Diagram 1.6), the Z coordinates must be programmed with a negative

sign.

Tool Position Note: the coordinate system is also dependent on the position of the tool slide,which may be either "in front of" or behind" the centre line as viewed from a positionin front of the machine tool (i.e. to the right or the left of the rotational axis of theworkpiece, as seen from the drive / clamped side), depending on the make of thelathe (see Diagram 1.7). In this manual the corresponding differentiation of toolsand their position are be denoted by the terms "preaxial / postaxial".

1. Basic Geometry


Absolute Dimensioning :

All specified dimensions are related to thesame point, which is the dimensioningreference point

Incremental Dimensioning:

Starting from the origin of the coordinatesystem, the distance between the currentpoint and the preceding point is measured.

Diagram 1.8

Tool motions according

to the absolute

dimensioning system:

The tool moves to Z 50.

Tool motions according to the

incremental

dimensioning system:

The tool moves by the value 30 in thenegative direction Z.

Diagram 1.9

1.3 Absolute / Incremental Dimensioning

© MTS GmbH 1998 17

1.3 Absolute Dimensioning, Incremental Dimensioning

(Relative Dimensioning)

The following dimensioning systems are commonly used with design drawings(see Diagram 1.8):

Absolute Dimensioning(Fixed Zero System)

In the absolute system all dimensions relate to the origin (zero point) of thecoordinate system, which is also called the dimensioning reference point.

Incremental

Dimensioning

Contrary to the absolute system, the incremental dimensioning system is based onthe specification of the distance between a current point and its preceding point onan axis. Because in this system a sequence of additive dimensions is produced, itis called incremental.

Depending on the type of dimensioning used in the drawing, the tool motions of anNC program can be programmed either in the absolute or in the incremental

system of coordinates. (see Diagram 1.9).

1. Basic Geometry


Cross turning and roughing tool Finishing tool

Diagram 1.10

Diagram 1.11

The angular position of the reversible tip isgreater than the infeed angle

The angular position of the reversible tip is lessthan the infeed angle

Diagram 1.12

1.4 Tool Geometry

© MTS GmbH 1998 19

1.4 Tool Geometry

The applications of a turning tool are determined by its geometry: the tool noseangles of a corner tool for cross turning or roughing, for instance, should be smallerthan those of a finishing tool (see. Diagram 1.10). Important parameters of the toolgeometry are (see Diagram 1.11) :

- Tool nose angles- Angle of the reversible tip- Length / Width of the tool nose- Tool nose radius

Further important parameters are (with internal tools):

- length and diameter of the shank- minimum diameter

and (with twist drills):

- diameter- maximum drilling depth

Angular Position of

the Reversible Tip

The angular position of the reversible tip is of critical importance especially with thegeneration of falling contours, because it determines the maximum possible angleat which the tool feeds down towards the interior of the workpiece (infeed angle). Ifthe angle is less than the angle of the contour to be cut, the contour will be gougedor the tool holder will collide with the workpiece contour. (see Diagram 1.12).

FFThe maximum angle at which the tool feeds down into the workpiece should bedetermined to be, as a rule, 2-3° smaller than the adjustable angular position of thereversible tip.

Minimum Diameter The minimum diameter of a drilled hole allowing the insertion of a tool (e.g. internalrecessing tool) without touching the surface of the workpiece.

1. Basic Geometry


The tool compensation value in Z is determinedby the distance on the Z-axis between thecutting point and the tool reference point.

The tool compensation values in X and Z aredetermined by the distances between the tool noseand the tool reference point in the direction of the Xand Z axes.

Diagram 1.13 : Tool compensation

Example: Radius 0,4X=-0,400Y=-0,400

Example: Radius 0,4X=-0,231Y=-0,400

Diagram 1.14 : The compensation vector determines the position of the tool nose

Diagram 1.15 : A comparison of tooling quadrants and TNC vectors (CNC lathe for toolingbehind centre)

1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage

© MTS GmbH 1998 21

1.4.1 Compensation Value Storage

In computing the tool motions the control system relates all programmedcoordinates to the tool reference point which is situated at the stop face of the toolmounting. Given the various tool geometries, the distance between the tool noseand the reference point will of course vary from tool to tool.

It follows that the distance between the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose

and the tool reference point must be determined for every tool, so that the actualtool path can be computed. Each of these differential values is stored as a tool

compensation value in a corresponding compensation value storage.

When a programmed tool change is to be executed in the course of an NCprogram, the system will read in the applicable compensation value storage, toaccount for the tool geometry in computing the tool path. Tool nose geometry dataare the following:

- distance in X from the tool reference point- distance in Z from the tool reference point- radius of the tool nose- tooling quadrant or compensation vector

Compensation

Values

The control system must be informed of the distances in the directions X and Zbetween the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose and the tool reference point foreach tool to be used (see Diagram 1.13). These differential values are stored incorresponding compensation value storages. In computing the feed motion of aselected tool, the control system accounts for the applicable compensation values,to the effect that the tool nose (i.e. the theoretical cutting point) feeds precisely tothe programmed target position.

Tool Nose

Compensation

Vector

In computing the cutter path, the control system assumes a theoretical cuttingpoint. The actual cutting edge of the tool nose however is rounded, with a radiusranging from some tenths of a millimeter to a circular tip.

With each tool the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose must be defined bythe tool nose compensation vector (TNC vector) to make sure that the controlsystem can compute the path of the actual cutting point in the execution of a cycle.

The TNC vector defines the theoretical position of the tool nose (in the directions Xand Z) relative to its centre (see Diagram 1.14). The tool management predefines aTNC vector for every tool available in the Simulator system.

Quadrants Alternatively the TNC vector can be determined by eight tooling quadrants (asshown in Diagram 1.15 ). This is common practice and applicable to standardcases. cannot, however, be applied in all cases.

1. Basic Geometry


P Theoretical tool nose(cutting point)

M Tool nose Centre

The actual cutting point of the reversible tipis dependent on the direction of cut.

Diagram 1.16 :

If tool nose compensation is not selected,the actual machining will deviate from theprogrammed contour on the rising andfalling segments of a contour, due to theradius of the tip of the tool.

Diagram 1.17 :

- - - Offset PathM Tool Nose Centre

If the tool nose compensation (TNC) isselected the system computes the motionof the tool nose centre on an offset pathequidistant to the contour, i.e. the actualcutting point will move exactly along theprogrammed contour of the workpiece.

Diagram 1.18 :

1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation (TNC)

© MTS GmbH 1998 23

1.4.2 Tool Nose Compensation TNC

The actual cutting point of the reversible tip will change in the course of machining,according to the direction of motion of the tool. (see Diagram 1.16).

In computing the tool motion the control system assumes the movement of thetheoretical cutting point of the tool nose along the programmed contour. Every timethe tool executes a programmed movement not parallel to either the X- or Z-axis,however, deviations from the desired contour and the corresponding dimensionswill occur, due to the radius of the tip of the tool employed (see Diagram 1.17).

When tool nose compensation is activated, the control system will compute thepath of the centre of the tool nose, equidistant to the contour, accounting forthe radius. Taking account of either the tooling quadrant or the TNC vector, thetheoretical cutting point is shifted to the centre of the tool nose radius, which willthen be computed to move on the path accordingly offset from the programmedcontour (see Diagram 1.18).

2. Introduction into NC Programming


N Block Number

G G- Command

X ³³ÃÃÄÄ Coordinates of the Target Position

Z ³³

F Feed

S Speed

T Tool Number/Turret Position

M Switches and Machine Functions (Spindle, Coolant ...)

Diagram 2.1 : Sequence of Words within an NC Block

2.1 NC Block Format

© MTS GmbH 1998 25

2 Introduction into NC Programming

A distinct program structure is essential for the generation of NC programs. Mostimportantly, the process of detecting eventual program errors will be muchfacilitated by a clear structure - especially if this task is carried out by a differentprogrammer.

2.1 Structure of an NC Block (Format)

Unlike the conventional lathe, a modern machine tool will be equipped with anumerical control system. The machining of a workpiece can be executedautomatically, provided that each operational step has been described in a"language" (code) which can be read by the control system. The collection of codeddescriptions referring to a workpiece is called an NC program.

Blocks Each NC program comprises a number of so-called blocks, which contain thecommands to be executed.These blocks are consecutively numbered; each block number consisting of theletter "N" plus a (e.g. three-digit) numeral. Block numbers appear at the beginningof each program line.

Words

Address, Value

As a rule an NC block is comprised of several words. Each word consists of anaddress (letter) and a value or code (numerals).

Example N110 G01 X+60 M03

| | | |

Block No. Word Word Word

A numeral may either denote a code (e.g. G01: Linear Feed Motion ) or a value(e.g. X+60 : Approaching the Target Coordinate X=60).

Word Word Word

G 01 | | Address Code

X 60 | | Address Value

F 0.07 | | Address Value

2. Introduction into NC Programming


2.2 Modal Commands and Non-modal Commands

Modal commands are self-retentive, i.e. they will take effect in consecutive NCblocks, until they are deleted or overwritten by a command at the same address.Non-modal commands instead are "block-oriented", they will be active only in theblock in which they are programmed.

Examples of modal commands are: spindle speed, feedrate, sense of rotation, toolselection etc. Once entered, these commands will remain active also with thesubsequently programmed blocks.

Example: N115 F0.07 S1800 M03

N120 G01 Z-60

N125 X+70

N130 Z-85

Explanation:(see Diagram 2.2)

Block No.

N115 A feedrate of 0,07 mm/rev and a spindle speed of 1800 r.p.m., with clockwisespindle rotation, is programmed.This technology data is automatically retained to take effect through NCblocks N120 to N130.

N120 The tool moves on a straight line (G01) from its current position to the targetposition Z=-60.

N125 Because G01 is a modal command, the tool moves once again on a (vertical)straight line upwards to X=70.

N130 The tool moves horizontal to Z=-85

Diagram 2.2 : Tool motions effected by modal commands (G01) for roughing

2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses

© MTS GmbH 1998 27

2.3 Application and Representation of Addresses

As a rule, an NC command contains several addresses. These addresses must bediscriminated as mandatory addresses (which must be programmed) and optionaladdresses (which may be programmed). In addition to this there are certainaddresses which must always be programmed together (combined addresses) aswell as others which cannot be programmed together (alternative addresses).

To distinguish between the mandatory and optional addresses, as well as the

combined and alternative addresses, in this guide the following mode of

representation is applied:

Addresses that must be programmed with a specific NC command ("mandatoryaddresses") appear in a separate NC block, without any additional programinformation.

Example G96 S...

When the G96 command (constant cutting speed) is programmed, the address S,followed by the desired value, is a mandatory entry to this block.

Addresses which are not mandatory but may instead be programmed with aspecific command ("Optional Addresses") appear in brackets in the applicableprogram line .

Example G78 X... Z... L... O... [D...] [I...]

In this example of an NC block, the addresses X, Z, L and O must be programmed.Only the programming of the addresses D and I is optional.

When one of the given addresses must or may be programmed, they appeartogether, separated by a slash.

Example G75 X... Z... S.../D...

In this case one of the addresses S and D must be programmed, i.e. either S or D.

Addresses that must always be programmed together (combined addresses) arewritten together, without any separating sign.

Example G82 K... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]

If X is programmed, Z must be programmed as well. If R is programmed, V mustbe programmed as well just so if H is programmed, W must be programmed aswell (and vice versa).

3. Miscellaneous Functions


3 Miscellaneous Functions (M-Functions)

With each NC block a number of additional functions (commonly referred to asmiscellaneous functions or M-Functions) can be programmed. These are oftenmachine functions and switches, e.g. to specify the feedrate, the spindle speed andthe tool change.

3.1 Activate/Deactivate Spindle

M03 Activate Spindle - Right-Hand Rotation (Clockwise)

M04 Activate Spindle - Left-Hand Rotation (Counter-Clockwise)

M05 De-Activate Spindle

M04: Spindle rotation counter-clockwise

The sense of rotation is determined asseen from the drive, i.e. in the line ofview of the positive Z-axis.

3.2 Coolant

M07 Activate pump - Coolant 1

M08 Activate pump - Coolant 2

M09 De-activate coolant pump

3.3 Programmed Halt

M00 After the execution of a block which contains the command M00, theprogram execution will be halted, to allow gauging of the workpiece.

3.4 Program End

© MTS GmbH 1998 29

3.4 Program End

M30 This command serves to terminate the program. The spindle rotationand the coolant pump will be deactivated and the automatic programrun is terminated. All incremental or rotary zero shifts (G59) areundone (with older types of NC lathes the punched tape will berewound).

M02 The system quits the automatic mode after execution of that NC blockin which M02 has been programmed ( with older types of NC lathesthe punched tape will not be rewound).

M99 This command terminates a subprogram. The control system willreturn to the main program and continue the program run from thecommand in the respective program line which is subsequent to thesubprogram invocation.

3.5 Lock / Unlock Centre Sleeve

M20 If the tailstock has been selected, the M20 command serves to lockthe centre sleeve.

M21 The M21 command unlocks the sleeve.

3.6 Feedrate

F... The feedrate is programmed in millimeters per revolution (mm/rev) .

Example: F000.200

Here the programmed feedrate is 0,2 millimeters per revolution.

FAlternatively the feedrate may be programmed in millimeters per minute (see G94and G95).

3.7 Spindle Speed

S... The spindle speed is programmed in revolutions per minute (RPM) .

Example: S1800

Here the programmed spindle speed is 1800 revolutions per minute.

3. Miscellaneous Functions


3.8 Tool Change

T... A tool change is programmed by a four-digit number at the address T.The first two digits designate the tool position in the turret, the last twodigits indicate the tool compensation storage.Example: T0808

Programming of this number effects the insertion of the correct tool atthe turret position 8 as well as the concurrent loading of toolcompensation storage No. 8.

In the CNC Simulator there is a maximum of 16 turret positions

available, as well as 99 compensation value storage registers. Thisprovides the opportunity, for example, to assign the compensationvalue storage No. 36 to the tool in the turret position No. 12, if thisseems applicable. The corresponding NC command would then be:T1236

FIf you decide to program an NC block containing one or several M - functionstogether with a G-command, please take care to observe the proper sequence ofcommand execution, as listed in the following table:

To be executed priorto the G-command:

To be executed afterthe G-command

M03/M04Activate spindle M00 Programmed halt

M07/M08Activate coolant M02 Program end without backspacing

M20/M21Lock/Unlock Sleeve M05 De-activate spindle

F Feedrate M09 De-activate coolant

S Speed M30 Program end and backspacing

T Tool change M99 Subprogram end

An NC block may contain a maximum of three M-commands.

Rapid Traverse G00

© MTS GmbH 1998 31

4 Programming Commands in Compliance with DIN 66025

Table of available DIN commands:

G00 Rapid Traverse

G01 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion

G02 Circular Interpolation Clockwise

G03 Circular Interpolation Counter-clockwise

G04 Dwell

G09 In-Position Programming (Deceleration)

G20 Unit of Measurement: (Inch)

G21 Unit of Measurement: (mm)

G22 Subprogram Invocation

G23 Repeated Program Part (Routine)

G24 Unconditional Jump Instruction

G25 Move to the Reference Point

G26 Move to the Tool Changing Position

G28 Positioning of the Tailstock

G33 Threading

G40 Cancel Tool Nose Compensation

G41/G42 Tool Nose Compensation to the left/right of the Contour

G51 Programmed Contour

G53 Cancel Incremental Zero Shift

G54 - G56, G58 Set Absolute Zero

G59 Incremental Zero Shift

G90 Activate Absolute Dimensioning

G91 Activate Incremental Dimensioning

G92 Speed Limitation

G94 Feedrate (mm/min)

G95 Feedrate (mm/rev)

G96 Constant Cutting Speed

G97 Cancel Constant Cutting Speed

G00 Rapid Traverse


Programming

Absolute Dimensions:

N... G90

N...

òN...

N115 G00 X+30 Z+5

Diagram G00.1 : Programming absolute dimensions - the tool moves to the point X=30/Z=5.In this example the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the

diameter.

Programming Incremental

Dimensions:

N... G91

N...

òN...

N115 G00 X-12,5 Z-35

Diagram G00.2 : Programming incremental dimensions - the tool moves in the direction X by

the value 12.5 and in the direction Z by the value -35 .Positioning the tool at X+30 / Z+5 will be possible only if the tool has beenpositioned at X+55, Z+40 (start position) in the preceding block.In this example the X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius.

Rapid Traverse G00

© MTS GmbH 1998 33

4.1 Rapid Traverse G00

Function The tool moves at the maximum possible speed to the target position asprogrammed by the X- and Z- coordinates. These coordinates may either beprogrammed in the absolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91).

NC Block G00 [X...]1) [Z...]1) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

Optional Addresses X X-Coordinate of the Target Point

Z Z-Coordinate of the Target Point

1) If a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinatewill be identical with that of the current tool position. It does not have to beprogrammed separately, as the coordinate address is self-retentive.

If none of the coordinates in X and Z has been programmed, only the rapid traversefunction will be retained.

F Feedrate (mm/rev)

S Speed (RPM)

T Tool Change

M Additional Function

Programming Hints If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of spindle speed isprogrammed within the same NC block, the tool change will be executed first; thechange of speed is effected at the beginning of the tool movement, while at thesame time the feedrate value is entered to the register.

A maximum of three M-commands may be programmed; their respective order ofexecution is described in Section 3 ("Miscellaneous Functions").

FWhen absolute dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is

programmed relative to the diameter of the workpiece.

When incremental dimensioning (G91) is operative, the X-coordinate is

programmed relative to the radius of the workpiece.

G01 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion


Example for Programming

Absolute Dimensions:

N... G90

N...

òN...

N115 G01 X+140 Z-90

Diagram G01.1 : Programming absolute dimensions - the tool moves to the point X=140, Z=-90.The X-coordinate is programmed relative to the diameter.

Example for Programming

Incremental Dimensions

N... G91

N...

òN...

N115 G01 X+20 Z-60

Diagram G01.2 : Programming incremental dimensions - the tool moves in the direction X by the

value 20 and in the direction Z by the value-60 .

Positioning the tool at X+140, Z-90 will be possible only if the tool has beenpositioned at X+100, Z-30 (start position) in the previous block.The X-coordinate is programmed relative to the radius.

Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01

© MTS GmbH 1998 35

4.2 Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01

Function The tool moves at the programmed feedrate to the target position as determined bythe X- and Z- coordinates. These coordinates may either be programmed in theabsolute system (G90) or in the incremental system (G91).

NC Block G01[X...]1) [Z...]1) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

Optional Addresses X X-Coordinate of the Target Point

Z Z-Coordinate of the Target Point

1) If a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinatewill be identical with that of the current tool position. It does not have to beprogrammed separately, as the coordinate address is self-retentive.If none of the coordinates in X and Z has been programmed, only the slow feedfunction will be retained.

F Feedrate (mm/rev)

S Speed (RPM)

T Tool Change


Programming Hints If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has beenprogrammed within the same NC block, these functions will be executed before thetool is moved to the target position.

A maximum of three M-commands may be programmed; their respective order ofexecution is described in Section 3 ("Miscellaneous Functions").

FWhen absolute dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is

programmed relative to the diameter of the workpiece.

When incremental dimensioning (G90) is operative, the X-coordinate is

programmed relative to the radius of the workpiece.

G02 Clockwise Circular Interpolation


4.3 Clockwise Circular Interpolation G02

Function The tool will move at the programmed feedrate clockwise on a circular arc to thetarget position as defined by the coordinates in X and Z.

NC Block G02 [X...]1) [Z...]1) [I...]2) [K...]2) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

Optional Addresses X X-Coordinate of the target pointWhen absolute dimensions are programmed (G91), X relates to the

workpiece diameter. When incremental dimensions are programmed

(G91), X relates to the workpiece radius.

Z Z-Coordinate of the target point

1) If a target coordinate is identical to the corresponding coordinate of the current toolposition, it does not have to be programmed, as the coordinate address is self-

retentive.

I Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and thecircle centre in the direction X, relative to the radius).

K Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and thecircle centre in the direction Z).

2) When I or K (as described above) are not programmed, the respective centrecoordinate is set to zero.

F Feedrate (mm/rev)S Spindle Speed (RPM)T Tool ChangeM Additional Function

Programming Example:

N110 G01 X+80 Z-40

N115 G02 X+140 Z-106 I+45 K-20

Programming Hints The coordinates X and Z may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90)or in the incremental system (G91). The default mode for definition of centrecoordinates I and K is incremental (relative to the starting point). In theconfiguration program for the control system for turning the centre dimensioningcan be set to the absolute system (see Configuration Manual).

If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has beenprogrammed within the same NC block, these commands will be executed beforethe tool is moved to the target position.

Counter-Clockwise Circular Interpolation G03

© MTS GmbH 1998 37

4.4 Circular Interpolation Counter-Clockwise G03

Function The tool will move at the programmed feedrate counter-clockwise on a circular arcto the target position as defined by the coordinates in X and Z.

NC Block G03 [X...]1) [Z...]1) [I...]2) [K...]2) [F...] [S...] [T...] [M...]

Optional Addresses X X-Coordinate of the target pointWhen absolute dimensions are programmed (G91), X is related to the

workpiece diameter. When incremental dimensions are programmed

(G91), X is related to the radius of the workpiece.

Z Z-Coordinate of the target point

1) If a target coordinate is identical to the corresponding coordinate of the current toolposition, it does not have to be programmed, as the coordinate address is self-

retentive.

I Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and thecentre of the circle in the direction X, relative to the radius).

K Circle Centre Incremental (distance between the starting position and thecentre of the circle in the direction Z).

2) When I or K (as described above) are not programmed, the respective centrecoordinate is set to zero.

F Feedrate (mm/rev)S Spindle Speed (RPM)T Tool ChangeM Additional Function


N110 G01 X+80 Z-50

N115 G03 X+140 Z-80 I-15 K-45

Programming Hints The coordinates X and Z may either be programmed in the absolute system (G90)or in the incremental system (G91). The default mode for definition of centrecoordinates I and K is incremental (relative to the starting point). In theconfiguration program for the control system for turning, the centre dimensioningcan be set to the absolute system (see Configuration Manual).

If a tool change, a change of the feedrate and/or a change of speed has beenprogrammed within the same NC block, these commands will be executed beforethe tool is moved to the target position.

G04 Dwell


4.5 Dwell G04

Function The tool movement is halted for the specified dwell time.

NC Block G04 X...

Addresses X Dwell time in seconds

Programming example N120 G04 X2

Programming Hints The dwell time must be specified in seconds, at the address X.The G04 command must be programmed in a separate NC block.

4.6 polygonal machining G08

Function The function G08 serves to machine an N polygon.

Condition The selected machining plane is the turning plane G14!

NC Block G08 O... V... W... [C...]

Optional Addresses O Number of corners of the N-polygon

V Length of the N-polygon• V is positive: the length is from the actual postion incremental in positive Z direction• V is negative:

the length is from the actual postion incremental in negative Z direction

W Width of the N-polygon• N is an even number: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of two

opposite areas.• N is an uneven number:

the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of one sideto the opposite area.

C rotary angle of the N-polygon

Programming

example

N50 G08 O006 V-072.000 W+040.00

3D view

of an hexagon

In-Position Programming (Deceleration) G09

© MTS GmbH 1998 39

4.7 In-Position Programming (Deceleration) G09

Function When G09 is programmed as part of an NC block, the feedrate will be deceleratedto zero as the programmed contour point is approached. After the standstill atprecisely the programmed position, the tool motion is resumed and the the nextcontour point, as programmed in the subsequent NC block, is approached.

NC Block G01 [X...]1) [Z...]1) G09 or

[X...]1) [Z...]1) G09

1) If a tool movement parallel to an axis is desired, the respective target coordinate isidentical to that of the current tool position. It does not have to be programmed, asthe coordinate address is self-retentive.

Explanation: As NC programs are executed continuously, i.e. without interruption of the feedmotion, position errors such as lags or overshots may occur. To move the toolprecisely to the programmed coordinates, the G09 command must beprogrammed.


N110 G00 X+40 Z-20

N115 G01 X+100 Z-35 G09

N120 G01 X+130 Z-60 G09

N125 G01 X+140 Z-95

Programming Hints The G09 command must be programmed at the end of the NC block.

G20 Inch Data Input


4.8 Inch Data Input G20

Function This command switches the unit of measurement from millimeters to inches.

NC Block G20

Explanation When this function has been programmed, all coordinate values must be specifiedin inches. Accordingly the units of the following technology data will change:

1. the feedrate is specified in inches per revolution (in/rev) instead ofmillimeters per revolution (mm/rev)

2. the cutting speed is specified in feet per minute (f/min) instead of meters perminute (m/min).

Programming Hints The G20 command must be programmed in a separate NC block.Switching the unit of measurement only takes effect within the current NC block.Inches will be the active unit of measurement until the system is switched back (byG21) to the millimeter unit.

At the end of each program (M30) the control system will automatically return to theconfigured unit of measurement.

Metric Data Input (mm) G21

© MTS GmbH 1998 41

4.9 Metric Data Input (mm) G21

Function This command serves to switch the unit of measurement from inches tomillimeters.

NC Block G21

Explanation When this function has been programmed, all coordinate values must be specifiedin millimeter. Accordingly the units of the following technology data will change:

1. the feedrate is specified in millimeters per revolution (mm/rev) instead ofinches per revolution (in/rev)

2. the cutting speed is specified in meters per minute (m/min) instead of feetper minute (f/min).

Programming Hints The G21 command must be programmed in a separate NC block.Switching the unit of measurement only takes effect within the current NC block.Millimeters will be the active unit of measurement until the system is switched back(by G21) to the inch unit.

At the end of each program (M30) the control system will automatically return to theconfigured unit of measurement.

G22 Subprogram Invocation



N... G22 U1234

N...

òN...

N... G22 U5678

Diagram G22.1 : Invocation of various subroutines from a main program


N... /01 G22 U1234

N...

òN...

N... /02 G22 U1234

Diagram G22.2 : Multiple invocation of a subprogram from a main program, wihth theomission of certain NC blocks (optional block skip).

Subprogram Invocation G22

© MTS GmbH 1998 43

4.10 Invocation of a Subprogram G22

Function After a subprogram invoked by the command G22 has been executed by thecontrol system, the main program will be resumed from the next block.

NC Block [/...] G22 U... [O...] [Q...] [S...]

Addresses U At the address U the name of the subprogram must be programmed.

Optional Addresses O number of the block where the subprogram starts.

Q number of the block where the subprogram ends.

S states the number of repetitions of the subprogram execution

/ The slash code serves to denote those NC blocks which are to be omitted inthe execution of the subprogram (see explanation below).

Explanation The programming of subroutines is recommended for the repeated execution ofcertain program parts, e.g. for the "roughing" and then "finishing" of a contour.When these cycles are executed as subprograms, repeated programming of thecontour becomes unneccessary.Further subprograms can be invoked from a subprogram; up to eight subprogramscan be nested.

Optional Block Skip The address "/" (slash code) causes the control system to omit ("skip") certain NCblocks during a subprogram run. A selection of blocks marked to be skippedconstitutes a "level" of block omissions, several of which may be defined for eachsubprogram, e.g.: those blocks which have been skipped in the first execution ofthe subprogram (level 1) will be executed during the second run of the samesubprogram (level 2). Conversely: The set of blocks executed at the first invocationof the subprogram will be marked to be skipped in the second run.

Example (see Diagram G22.2 on the previous page):- During the first execution of the subprogram (/01 U1234) the control system

will skip all NC blocks marked by /01.- During the second run of the same subprogram (/02 U1234) the control

system will skip all NC blocks marked by /02.

Programming Hints Programming of the addresses O, Q and S is not mandatory:- if O and Q have not been programmed, the complete subprogram will be

executed.- if S has not been programmed, only a single subprogram run will be

executed.

At the end of each defined subprogram the command M99 must be programmed,to cause the control system to return to the main program, or to the subprogramfrom which the current subprogram has been invoked. This return condition may beedited in the configuration program (cf. the Configuration Manual: Subprograms).

G23 Repeated Program Parts


4.11 Repeated Program Parts G23

Function The command G23 causes the repetition of a program part.

NC Block G23 O... Q... [S...]

Addresses O Start Block Number:Number of the main program block at which the repeated part starts.

Q End Block Number:Number of the main program block at which the repeated part ends.

Optional Addresses S Number of repetitions:The value programmed at the address S determines the desired number ofrepetitions of the program part.


N190 G23 O160 Q180

Programming Hints Programming the addresses O and Q is mandatory. If the address S is notprogrammed, a single repetition of the specified program part will be executed.

Programming a repeated part of a subprogram is not allowed.

Modal commands are not affected by program part repetition.

Unconditional Jump G24

© MTS GmbH 1998 45

4.12 Unconditional Jump G24

Function The command G24 instructs the control system to continue the machining from theNC block programmed at the address O.

NC Block G24 O...

Addresses O Target Block Number:At this address the number of the main program block must be specifiedfrom which the program execution will be continued.


N110 G24 O185

Programming Hints Programming a jump instruction as part of a subprogram is invalid.

G25 move to the Reference Point


4.13 Move to the Reference Point G25

Function With the command G25 you go to the reference point of the CNC machine in rapidspeed. To define the rapid speed movement and the reference point call G25 andenter the values. For this purpose the optional addresses O and Q are available.

NC Block G25 [F...] [S...] [M...] [O...] [Q...]

Optional Addresses F Infeed

S Number of spindle rotations

M Switch or machine functions

When programming G25 three M commands can be programmedsimultaneously

FFThe addresses O and Q can be programmed several times within the NCcommand G25, and each time with different values.

If neither of the addresses O and Q is programmed the turret reference point inrapid speed movement is moved linear in X and Z (i.e. the shortest way) to thereference point. Please, consider the present tool position when programming thecommand G25 to guarantee a collision-free movement of the turret

O0 going to the reference point with linear interpolation of the

coordinates X and Z (standard)

O1 going to the reference point only in X coordinate (Z remains

unchanged)

O2 going to the reference point in the Z coordinate (X remains

unchanged)

O3 going to the reference point first in the X coordinate and then in the Z

coordinate

O4 going to the reference point first in the Z coordinate and then in the X

coordinate

Q0 going to the reference point with the tool holder reference point

(standard)

Q1 going to the reference point with the tool carrier reference point

Programming Hints For the programming of the command G25 no coordinate entries are needed asthe location of the reference point is specified in the machine configuration and it isconsequently known to the CNC control. Within the MTS CNC simulator the set-upcan be made in the configuration of the CNC machine.

Move to the Tool-Changing Position G26

© MTS GmbH 1998 47

4.14 Move to the Tool-Changing Position G26

Function With the command G26 the tool change point can be approached in rapid speedmovement. In G26 the rapid speed movement can be specified in detail. For thispurpose the optional addresses O and Q are used

NC Block G26 [F...] [S...] [M...] [O...] [Q...]

Optional Addresses F Infeed

S Number of spindle rotations

M Switch or machine functions

When programming G26 three M commands can be programmedsimultaneously

FFThe addresses O and Q can be programmed several times within the NCcommand G26, and each time with different values.

If neither of the addresses O and Q is programmed the turret reference point inrapid speed movement is moved linear in X and Z (i.e. the shortest way) to thereference point. Please, consider the present tool position when programming thecommand G26 to guarantee a collision-free movement of the turret

O0 going to the tool change point with linear interpolation of the


O1 going to the tool change point only in X coordinate (Z remains

unchanged)

O2 going to the tool change point in the Z coordinate (X remains

unchanged)

O3 going to the tool change point first in the X coordinate and then in the

Z coordinate

O4 going to the tool change point first in the Z coordinate and then in the

X coordinate

Q0 going to the tool change point with the tool holder reference point

(standard)

Q1 going to the tool change point with the tool carrier reference point

Programming Hints For the programming of the command G26 no coordinate entries are needed asthe location of the reference point is specified in the machine configuration and it isconsequently known to the CNC control. Within the MTS CNC simulator the set-upcan be made in the configuration of the CNC machine.

FDetermination of the coordinates of the tool changing position is part of theconfiguration (see the Configuration Manual).

G28 positioning the Tailstock


4.15 Positioning the Tailstock G28

Note In the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6 a CNC machine with a counter spindle hasthe command G28 that means Machining on the counter spindle.

For a machine without a counter spindle the command G28 means Positioning theTailstock

Function The G28 command serves to move the tailstock in the course of an NC program.

NC Block G28 Z...

Addresses Z Z-Coordinate of the target point (absolute)


N190 G28 Z120

Programming Hints The G28 command must be programmed as a separate NC block.

Thread Cutting G33

© MTS GmbH 1998 49


N110 G00 X+80 Z+10

N115 G33 X+80 Z-80 F2,5

Diagram G33.1 : Cylinder thread


N110 G00 X+40 Z+10

N115 G33 X+100 Z-70 F3

Diagram G33.2 : Taper thread

G33 Thread Cutting


4.16 Thread Cutting G33 (Chasing Cycle)

Function The G33 command serves to program a thread cutting cycle. Feedrate and spindlespeed will be automatically adapted to the programmed lead.

NC Block G33 X... Z... F...

Addresses X X-coordinate of the target point

Z Z-coordinate of the target point

F Lead

Explanation When only G33 is programmed, the thread will be cut in a single pass. If threadcutting in consecutive steps is desired, each step must be programmed as aseparate NC block. The current tool position at the cycle invocation will beconsidered as the starting point. It follows that the tool must have been positionedat the desired starting point by appropriate programming in the previous block.

Conversely with threading cycle G31 the starting point is computed by the controlsystem.

Whether a cylinder thread or a taper thread results from the machining isdependent on the position of the programmed end point in relation to the startingpoint.

Programming Hints With cylinder and taper threads <= 45° the lead F is marked off on the Z-axis cross.With taper threads of > 45° the lead value is entered on the X-axis (see DiagramG33.2).

Alternatively the lead F may be programmed at addresses I (direction X) and K(direction Z). The greater of the two values should be entered and the smaller valuewill be computed by the system.

Each threading pass must be programmed separately, just as the feed

adjustment, and the retreat and return motions must each be programmed in

a separate NC block.

Tool Nose Compensation G41 / G42

© MTS GmbH 1998 51


N170 G81 X+76 Z+4 I+7N175 G41N180 (Contour Description)

N235 G40N240 G80

Diagram G41 : Tool Nose Compensation to the Left of the Contour


N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6N175 G42N180 (Contour Description)

N235 G40N240 G80

Diagram G42 : Tool Nose Compensation to the Right of the Contour

G41 / G42 Tool Nose Compensation


4.17 Tool Nose Compensation G41 / G42

- to the Left of the Contour G41

- to the Right of the Contour G42

Function In computing the feed motion, the control system assumes the (theoretical) path ofthe tool tip along the programmed contour. Depending on the radius of the toolnose , however, the resulting contour and its dimensions will be different from theprogrammed contour whenever the tool motion is not parallel to the X or Z axis (seeDiagrams G41 and G42).

If tool nose compensation (TNC) is selected, the system will compute an offset path(equidistant) for the tool tip, accounting for the actual radius of the tool nose as wellas for the position of the theoretical tool nose (cutting point) relative to the tipcentre. In this calculation the tooling quadrant or the compensation vector (TNCvector) of the theoretical cutting point of the tool nose are used. In this way thedesired contour can be programmed directly from the workpiece drawing;transformatory calculations become unneccessary (cf. Section1.6: Tool Geometry,ff.).

The qualifications left / right apply to the direction in which the tool travels along thecontour.

NC Block G41 Compensation to the right of the contour (viewed in cutting direction)

G42 Compensation to the left of the contour (viewed in cutting direction)

Programming Hints If tool nose compensation (TNC) has been activated for a program part, thefollowing must be observed:

- As long as tool nose compensation is selected, no zero shifts (G53 to G56,G58 and G59) can be effected.

- When TNC is selected only the cycles G78, G85, G87 and G88 can beinvoked.

- No tool changing functions can be programmed.- Radii of internal corner roundings must be greater than the radius of the tool

nose.- When TNC is selected, the commands M05 and M09 will be ignored.

4.18 Cancel Tool Nose Compensation G40

Function The G40 command cancels tool nose compensation effected by the commandsG41 and G42 .

NC Block G40

Programming Hints The G40 command must be programmed as a separate NC block.

Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position G48

© MTS GmbH 1998 53

4.19 In Rapid Travel Movement to the Target Position G48

Function With the command G48 it is possible to program travel movements in rapid speed.Unlike the standard command G00 the programmed target position is approachedin case of G48 not with the cutting edge point but either with the tool carrierreference point (standard) or with the tool holder reference point (switch Q1). Howthe programmed target position is approached can be defined with the optionaladdress O.

NC command G48 X... Z... [O...] [Q...]

FFThe addresses O and Q can be programmed several times and respectively withdifferent values within the NC command G48

Addresses X, Z Coordinates of the target point of the tool movement

Optional

addresses

O0 moving to the target position with linear interpolation of the


O1 moving to the target position in X coordinate only (Z remains

unchanged)

O2 moving to the target position in Z coordinate only (X remains

unchanged)

O3 moving to the target position first in X then in Z coordinate

O4 moving to the target position first in Z then in X coordinate

Q0 moving to the target position with the reference point of the tool

support (standard)

Q1 moving to the target position with the reference point of the work

fixture

G51 Description of a Final Contour



N170 G51 X+0 Z+0 O001 Q001

N175 (Contour Description)

òN285 G50

Diagram G51 : Automatic overlay display of the workpiece contour onto the blank.

Description of a Final Contour G51

© MTS GmbH 1998 55

4.20 Description of a Final Contour G51

Function In the Simulator, NC program blocks can be generated by "manual" positioning ofthe tools, i.e. without entering a command code. This way of creating a program ispart of the so-called Teach-In mode (see the Simulator Operation Manual for adetailed description). To avoid collisions in the manual mode, the commands G51and G50 should be used in determining the final contour of the workpiece.

NC Block G51 X... Z... O... Q...

ò

G50

Addresses X X-Coordinate of the first contour point

Z Z-Coordinate of the first contour point

O001 Overlay display of the final contour onto the blank

O000 No overlay display of the final contour

Q001 Collision monitoring operativeDuring the manual tooling an accoustic alarm indicates any possiblecollisions with the programmed final contour; a corresponding error messageappears in the dialogue line.

Q000 No collision monitoring

Explanation The command G51 and the subsequent address values (X and Y to define thebeginning point of the contour, O and Q to select the desired options) must beentered prior to generation of the contour. The easiest way to determine a contouris by employing the WOP functions (see below: Segment Contour Programming).Entering the G50 command terminates the contour generation.

After this, the user must return to the Teach-In mode for manual tooling.

For a more detailed description of the Teach-In mode, please refer to the CNCSimulator Operation Manual.

Programming Hints To ensure an error-free graphic display of the programmed final contour, thecontour definition must be complete, i.e. the starting point as well as the end pointmust be situated on the centre line (rotation axis).

G54 - G56 and G58 Define Workpiece Zero Point


Blank:

The reference point is the machine datum

Diagram G54.1


N10 G54 X+0 Z+200

Diagram G54.2: To generate the contour in this example the workpiece zero point ispositioned on the face end of the workpiece (G54).


N135 G56 X+87 Z+114

Diagram G54.3 : To execute the recessing cuts in this example the workpiece zero point ispositioned off the rotation axis (G56).

Define Workpiece Zero Point G54 - G56 and G58

© MTS GmbH 1998 57

4.21 Define Workpiece Zero - Absolute: G54 - G56 and G58

Function The workpiece zero is set at the position defined by the programmed X and Zcoordinates, related to the machine datum. A total of four different zero points maybe defined and stored.

NC Block G54 [X...] [Z...] or G55 [X...] [Z...] or

G56 [X...] [Z...] or G58 [X...] [Z...]

Addresses X X-Coordinate of the current workpiece zero

Z Z-Coordinate of the current workpiece zero

Explanation As mentioned above, the control system will interpret all specified coordinates asrelated to a previously defined zero point, which may be the datum (see DiagramG54.1) or a workpiece zero determined by touching the part.

Furthermore a specific workpiece zero can be defined at will for each NC program.To avoid additional computing efforts in the programming, however, it should bepositioned in a way that as many coordinate values as possible can be immediatelyread in as specified in the workshop drawing. With turning workpieces, in mostcases the zero point will be situated on the rotational axis (X=0) on the front face ofthe part (see Diagram G54.2).

To facilitate the programming of complex contours (see the recessing cuts shownin Diagram G54.3) it is advisable to define a new zero in compliance with thecoordinate system of the design drawing. Using the commands G54, G55, G56 andG57 up to four different workpiece zero points can be defined - the respectivecoordinates may either be specified in the applicable program line or pre-defined

and stored in the set-up mode, by setting the axes to zero or touching theworkpiece (for details, see the CNC Simulator Manual). Each stored zero point canbe activated by the corresponding address in the NC program (e.g.: G56 - seeDiagram G54.3).

Programming Hints A zero point storage is assigned to each of the four G-commands G54, G56 andG58. The command G54, for example, will also activate the corresponding G54zero point storage. If one or two coordinate addresses are programmed togetherwith G54, the applicable values are entered to the zero point storage prior toactivating the zero. Alternatively these coordinates may be defined in the setupmode, by touching the workpiece.

Coordinate values of the current zero point always relate to the machine zero, evenwhen several origins are defined within the same NC program, i.e. a workpiecezero is always determined in absolute coordinates.

The defined zero points are self-retentive: they will remain operative, even after achange of program, until they are overwritten. After a restart of the CNC Simulator,all coordinates are set to zero.

In the CNC Simulator the position of the machine zero can be defined in theconfiguration program (see the Configuration Manual for a detailed description).

G59 Incremental Zero Shift



N110 G59 X+40 Z+100

Diagram G59.1 : The origin of the coordinate system is shifted to the absolute coordinatesX=40 / Z=100 .


N110 G59 X+40 Z+100 I+20 K-30 A+120

Diagram G59.2 : The coordinate system is first shifted to the point X=40 / Z= 100 and then rotatedby 120° about the point defined by the incremental coordinates I=-20K=-30.

Incremental Zero Shift G59

© MTS GmbH 1998 59

4.22 Incremental Zero Shift G59

Function The command G59 serves to shift and concurrently rotate the coordinate system.

NC Block G59X... Z... [I...] [K...] [A...]

Addresses X value by which the intermediate coordinate system is shifted along the X-axis.

Z value by which the intermediate coordinate system is shifted along the Z-axis.

Optional Addresses I X-coordinate of the rotation centre, incremental to the currently shiftedintermediate origin

K Z-coordinate of the rotation centre, incremental to the currently shiftedintermediate origin

A Rotation angle, incremental

Explanation In many cases the programming of complex workpiece contours can be muchfacilitated by defining a so-called "intermediate reference point" (i.e. a temporarycoordinate system, to which the dimensioning will relate, instead of the originalsystem). The command G59 serves to shift and/or rotate the coordinate system asdesired.

If only a shift of the coordinate system is intended, the origin of the new system canbe defined by setting up the applicable X and Z-coordinates. In this case it is notnecessary to program the addresses I, K and A (see Diagram G59.1).

If additionally a rotation of the coordinate system about a specific point is desired,this centre of rotation must be programmed at addresses I and K, as well as therotation angle at address A. The values for I and K must be programmed

incrementally, i.e. relative to the shifted (intermediate) coordinate system (seeDiagram G59.2). To rotate the shifted coordinate system about its origin, only angleA needs to be programmed.

Subsequently programmed coordinate values relate to the shifted and/or rotatedcoordinate system. They will be retained until the temporary system is cancelled ora further shift is effected by the G59 command (cf. the G53 command).

Programming Hints Any shift effected by the command G59 applies to the current origin (which itselfmay have been set by a G59 shift).Remember that the rotation angle increases accordingly when repeated zero shiftsare effected within the same program.

G53 Cancel Zero Shift


4.23 Cancel Incremental Zero Shift G53

Function The command G53 serves to cancel an incremental zero shift (cf. G59). Theoriginal coordinate system as previously determined by an absolute zero shift or bytouching of the workpiece is again adapted.

NC Block G53

Programming Hints The command G53 must be programmed as a separate NC block

Absolute Dimensions G90

© MTS GmbH 1998 61

4.24 Activate Absolute Dimensions G90

Function When the command G90 is programmed, all subsequently entered coordinatevalues relate to the workpiece zero. The target position, to which the tool shallmove, is programmed in absolute coordinates, regardless of the current toolposition.

NC Block G90


N... G90

N...

òN...

N115 G01 X+140 Z-90

Programming Hints When absolute dimensions are specified, the X coordinate is related to thediameter.

The absolute coordinate system remains operative until it is deactivated by G91(activating the incremental dimensioning).

G91 Incremental Dimensions


4.25 Activate Incremental Dimensions G91

Function When the incremental system (also called the relative system) is activated, theprogrammed coordinates of the target position relate to the actual tool position; i.e.the values (distances) must be specified by which the tool will move along therespective axis from the current position.

NC Block G91


N... G91

N...

òN...

N115 G01 X+20 Z-60

Programming Hints When incremental dimensions are specified, the X coordinate relates to the

radius.

The incremental coordinate system remains operative until it is deactivated by G90(activating the absolute dimensioning)

Spindle Speed Limitation G92

© MTS GmbH 1998 63

4.26 Spindle Speed Limitation G92

Function When a constant cutting speed (G96) is programmed for cross turning down to azero diameter, the spindle will accelerate to its maximum speed. To preventpossibly serious problems with the workpiece clamping, the programming of aspindle speed limitation (G92) together with the constant cutting speed isrecommended.

NC Block G92S...

Addresses S Maximum Spindle Speed (RPM)


N110 G92 S1500

Programming Hints The spindle speed limitation will only take effect if a constant cutting speed (G96)has been programmed.

G94 Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute)


4.27 Feedrate (Millimeters per Minute) G94

Function The command G94 serves to program the feedrate. The unit of measurement is"Millimeters per Minute".

NC Blocks G94F...

Addresses F Feedrate (mm/min)


N120 G94 F500.000

In this example the feedrate is 500 millimeters per minute.

FIf the unit of measurement has been switched from millimeters to inches (see NCcommand G20), the programmed feedrate will be interpreted accordingly in inchesper minute.

Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution) G95

© MTS GmbH 1998 65

4.28 Feedrate (Millimeters per Revolution) G95

Function The command G95 serves to program the feedrate per revolution. The measuringunit is millimeters.

NC Block G95F...

Addresses F Feedrate (mm/rev)


N080 G95 F000.300

In this example the feedrate is 0.3 millimeters per revolution.

FWhen the unit of measurement is switched from millimeters to inches (see NCcommand G20), the programmed feedrate will be interpreted accordingly in inches

per revolution.

G96 Constant Cutting Speed


4.29 Constant Cutting Speed G96

Function The command G96 serves to program a constant cutting speed.

NC Block G96S... [F...] [T...] [M...]

Addresses S Cutting Speed (m/min)

Optional Addresses F Feedrate (mm/rev)

T Tool Change


Explanation With turning operations the surface cutting speed is dependent on the programmedspindle speed as well as on the current X-coordinate of the tool nose. To keepthe cutting speed constant, the result from the multiplication of the speed and thetool nose coordinate in X must be kept as a constant value in the control system.When smaller X-coordinate values are specified, the spindle speed will increaseaccordingly.


N125 G96 S210

Programming Hints When the machining requires small X-coordinate values, the command G92 shouldbe programmed to limit the spindle speed, so as to avoid exceeding the maximumspeed permissible with the clamping device.

If the addresses F, T and M have been defined in a previous block, they need notbe programmed once again in the G 96 block.

The constant cutting speed remains operative until it is deactivated by G97 or isoverwritten by another G96 command.

4.30 Cancel Constant Cutting Speed G97

Function The command G97 serves to cancel the constant cutting speed command G96.

NC Block G97[S...]

Optional Addresses S Spindle speed in RPM

Programming Hints If no spindle speed S is programmed in the G97 block, the speed computed at thelast activation of the constant cutting speed command G96 will be retained.

The maximum spindle speed, as programmed in G92, will also be retained forfuture invocations of the G96 command.

5. Cycles

© MTS GmbH 1998 67

5 Cycles

5.1 Complete Table of Available Cycles

Available Cycle Pages

G31 Threading Cycle 69

G36 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles 72

G57 Finishing Allowance 73

G60 Face Milling Cycle (with Driven Tools) 262 and 304

G61 Drilling Cycle (with Driven Tools) 264, 278, 293 and 306

G62 Thread Tapping (with Driven Tools) 265, 279, 294 and 307

G63 Reaming/Boring (with Driven Tools) 266, 280, 295 and 308

G64 Square Pocket/Groove (with Driven Tools) 267, 281, 296 and 309

G65 Circular Pocket (with Driven Tools) 268, 282, 297 and 310

G66 Tapping (with Driven Tools) 270, 283, 298 and 311

G67 Cycle on a Circle (with Driven Tools) 270, 284, 299 and 312

G68 Cycle on a Radius (with Driven Tools) 271, 285, 300 and 313

G69 Cycle at a Point (with Driven Tools) 272, 286, 301 and 314

G75 Straight Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contours 77

G76 Cross Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contours 79

G78 Clearance Cutting Cycle G78 / DIN 509 Type E and FThread Undercut / DIN 76

8185

G79 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides 85

G80 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) 107

G81 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour 88

G82 Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour 98

G83 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle 111

G84 Deep Drilling Cycle 115

G85 Clearance Cutting Cycle G85 / DIN 509 Type E and F ThreadUndercut / DIN 76

117

G86 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses 123

G87 Recessing Cycle for any Contour 124

G88 Radius/Chamfer Cycle 131

G89 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) 135

G31 Threading Cycle



N110 G00 X+140 Z+10

N115 G31 X+80 Z-80 A+30 D-2 F3 S6

Diagram G31.1 : Single thread - the Z-coordinate of the starting point is identical with theZ-coordinate of the theoretical start of the thread.


N110 G00 X+25 Z+3

N115 G31 X+20 Z-37 D+1.534 F2.5 J+0.3

Diagram G31.2 : Single thread - the tool adjustment in X and Z per cutting pass isprogrammed at the addresses J and K.

Threading Cycle G31

© MTS GmbH 1998 69

5.2 Threading Cycle G31

Function The G31 cycle serves to program traverse and taper threads with a constant lead ata maximum angle of 45° to the Z-axis. This cycle may be employed with external aswell as internal machining.

NC Block G31X... Z... D... F... S.../J... [A...] [Q...] [I.../E...]

or G31X... Z... D... F... K... A... [Q...] [I.../E...]

Addresses X X-Coordinate of the theoretical end of the thread:- determines the nominal diameter with external threads- determines the core diameter with internal threads.

Z Z-Coordinate of the theoretical end point of the thread.

D Depth of the thread relative to the radius.

F Lead in the Z- direction.

S Number of cutting operations.

J Infeed per cutting pass in the direction X (relating to the radius).

K Infeed per cutting pass in the direction Z.If the address K is programmed, a thread angle greater than zero must alsobe programmed.

Optional Addresses A Thread angle to the X-axis determining the infeed. The value entered at Amust be between 0 and 60 degrees.

Q Segmentation of the final feed adjustment. Any positive value may beentered at Q .When Q is programmed, the final feed adjustment will be divided into foursteps:1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/8 of the previous cutting depth.

I Difference of radii between the theoretical start and end of the thread:- positive sign for external threads- negative sign for internal threads

E Thread angle to the Z-axis at the end of the thread. The absolute valueentered at E must not exceed 45 degrees.

Explanation The theoretical start and end of the thread, defining the minor diameter (threadcore), constitute important parameters for the execution of the threading cycle G31The end of the thread is determined by X- and Z-coordinates, while the theoreticalstart is established by the system from the programmed addresses.

- the X-coordinate will be computed according to the values entered at theaddresses I or E . If neither I nor E has been programmed, the X-coordinateof the start is equal to the X-coordinate of the end (cylinder thread).

- the Z-coordinate of the start of the thread is always equal to the Z-coordinateof the starting point when the cycle invoked.

G31 Threading Cycle



N110 G00 X+140 Z+10

N115 G31 X+100 Z-75 D+1.34 F3 S4 E+30

Diagram G31.3 : Taper thread - the thread angle can be programmed either by the addressE (angle to the Z-axis) or by the address I (difference between the radii at thetheoretical start and end of the thread).


N110 G00 X+140 Z+10

N115 G31 X+100 Z-75 A+30 D-2 F3 S4

Diagram G31.4 : Internal thread - the X-coordinate of the starting point must be less than theX-coordinate of the theoretical start of the thread.

Threading Cycle G31

© MTS GmbH 1998 71

Prior to the invocation of cycle G31 the starting point must be approached in thedirections X and Z. The system will then discern internal and external threading byreading the difference between the starting position and the programmed X-coordinate:

- If the X-coordinate of the starting point is less than the coordinate of thetheoretical end of the thread, an internal thread cut will be executed(see Diagram G31.4).

- If the X-value is greater, an external thread cut will be executed(see Diagram G31.1).

When the address S is not programmed the control system will compute thenumber of cuts from the programmed addresses. After each cutting pass the toolreturns to the Z-coordinate of the starting position in rapid motion. After completionof the cycle the tool returns to the starting position.

Programming Hints As the Z-coordinate of the starting point is equal to the Z-coordinate of thetheoretical start of the thread, the starting point must be determined at a sufficientdistance from the workpiece, to ensure the necessary path velocity (speed xfeedrate) has been reached before the tool engages in the workpiece.

Accordingly, the deceleration rate of the drive must be accounted for whenprogramming the theoretical end of the thread.

The number of programmed cutting operations must be greater than one.

G36 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles


5.3 Travel Range Limitation G36 for Multipass Cycles

The G36 command serves to limit the travel range of the tool when the multipasscycle G83 is executed.

For a more detailed explanation, see the description of the contouring cycle G83below.

Finishing Allowance G57

© MTS GmbH 1998 73

5.4 Finishing Allowance G57

Function With command G57 it is possible to program finishing allowance for roughingcycles. The roughing cycle called below (e.g. G81) then generates a contour whichis shifted by the value of the finishing allowance in X, Z or equidistant.

NC Command G57 [X...] [Z...] [B...]

Addresses X Finishing allowance in X (with reference to the diameter)

When programming finishing allowance in X the following sign rules have tobe considered:

• a positive sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of thepositive X axis

• a negative sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of thenegative X axis

Z Finishing allowance in Z

When programming finishing allowance in Z the following sign rules have tobe considered:

• a positive sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of thepositive Z axis

• a negative sign generates a contour shifted into the direction of thenegative Z axis

B equidistant finishing allowance in X and Z

The programming of an equidistant finishing allowance is always necessaryif the contour path is not monotonous. When programming finishingallowance in Z the following sign rules have to be considered:

Outside machining:

• a positive sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the positive Xaxis

• a negative sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the negativeX axis

Inside machining:

• a positive sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the negative Xaxis

• a negative sign generates an equidistant in the direction of the positive Xaxis

In general, it is possible to combine freely the finishing allowances X, Z and B in theNC program.

Programming

hints

When starting the computer no finishing allowance is active. If G57 is programmedthe finishing allowance remains active within the active NC programs until it isdeactivated or G57 is re-programmed with other values.

G57 Finishing Allowance


table of programming

for finishingNC block No NC block valid finishing allowance

allowances ... starting situation ð allowance X = 0allowance Z = 0allowance B = 0

N080 G57 X+2 Z+2 ð allowance X = 2allowance Z = 2allowance B = 0

N170 G57 X+4 ð allowance X = 4allowance Z = 2allowance B = 0

N245 G57 X+0 Z+0 ð allowance X = 0allowance Z = 0allowance B = 0

N360 G57 B+1.5 X+1 ð allowance X = 1allowance Z = 0allowance B = 1.5

Outside machining

a) finishing

allowance in X

and Z of a

monotonously

ascending

contour

b) equidistant

finishing

allowance of a

non

monotonous

contour

Inside machining

a) finishing

allowance in X

and Z of a

monotonously

descending

contour

b) equidistant

finishing

allowance of a

non

monotonous

contour

G75 Straight Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contour



N145 G00 X+105 Z+3

N150 G75 X+30 Z-55 I+1 K+0.5

D+6 H+25 W+1

Diagram G75.1

Degression of infeed and minimum

cutting depth

Example: R = 0.5 mmV = 2.5 mm

In this example the programmed cuttingdepth is D = 4 mm .After each cutting pass the infeed is reducedby the value R (0.5 mm). At address V , 2.5mm is determined as the minimum value towhich the cutting depth may be reduced. Allremaining passes will be executed at thisvalue once it has been reached.

Diagram G75.2

Optimizing the remaining cuts

Example: D = 4 mmL = 50

In this example, with a depth of cut D = 4mm programmed, the remaining stock to beremoved is 5 mm.Removing this stock would normally requiretwo passes. The optimizing function servesto increase the depth of cut by L = 50 (50%)to a maximum of 6 mm. In this way one ofthe passes is dispensed with.

Diagram G75.3

Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G75

© MTS GmbH 1998 77

5.5 Straight Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G75

Function The command G75 serves to program a straight (lengthwise) roughing cycle forrectangular workpiece contours. This cycle is applicable to internal as well as toexternal machining.

NC Block G75X... Z... S.../D...

[I...] [K...] [H...W...] [R...V...] [L...]

Addresses X, Z Endpoint coordinates

S Number of cutting passes - D may be programmed as an alternative.

D After each pass the tool is adjusted in direction X by the value programmedat D - S can be programmed as an alternative. When the cycle is executedthe actual depth of cut may be different from the programmed value D,depending on the optional programming of addresses R, V and L.(see optional programming of addresses R, V and L)

Optional Addresses I, K Finishing allowances in X (as related to the radius) and Z

H, W Chip-breaking (see Straight Roughing Cycle G65)Address H determines the distance traveled by the tool along the Z-axisbefore the cut is interrupted, while address W determines the distance bywhich the tool moves back after the interruption. The addresses W and Hmust always be programmed as a combination.

R Degression of cutting depth (see Diagram G75.2)At R the value by which the infeed D is to be reduced with each pass isprogrammed.If R is programmed D and V must be programmed as well.

V Minimum cutting depth (see Diagram G75.2)At address V the minimum cutting depth is determined. In this way the cuttingdepth D, while reduced by the degression, will not be less than value V.If V is programmed D and R must be programmed as well.

L Optimizing the remaining cuts (see Diagram G75.3)At address L an integral percentage (between 1 and 100) of the cutting depthD is programmed. The control system will compute the depth of cut toremove the remaining stock, increasing the infeed by a maximum of thepercentage programmed at L, in order to dispense with one cutting pass infeeding down to the programmed finish.

Explanation When the cycle is invoked, the starting point is determined by the position of thetool. Accounting for the finishing allowances I and K a right-angled contour will beturned by removing the stock of material represented by the rectangular square inDiagram G75.2).The number of passes required can either be programmed ataddress S or may be computed by the NC system after the infeed D and after, theoptional addresses R, V and L have been specified.

Programming Hints The feedrate and the cutting speed must have been programmed in a precedingNC block.As the first infeed is executed from the initial tool position (the starting point), whenthe cycle is invoked the tool must be positioned in direction X either above (outside)the external diameter of the blank or below (inside) the internal diameter,depending on whether external or internal machining is required.

G76 Cross Roughing Cycle - Rectangular Contour



N145 G00 X+105 Z+3

N150 G76 X+30 Z-40 I+1 K+0.5

D+4 H+15 W+1

Diagram G76.1

Degression and minimum cutting

depth

Example: R = 1 mmV = 3 mm

In this example the programmed cuttingdepth is D = 6 mm .After each cutting pass the infeed isreduced by the value R (1 mm). Ataddress V , 3 mm is determined as theminimum value to which the cuttingdepth may be reduced, so that allremaining passes will be executed atthis value once it has been reached.

Diagram G76.2

Optimizing the remaining cuts

Example: D = 4 mmL = 50

In this example, with a programmedcutting depth of D = 4 mm, theremaining stock to be removedamounts to 5.5 mm.Removing this stock would normallyrequire two passes. The optimizingfunction serves to increase the depth ofcut by L = 50 (50%) to a maximum of 6mm. In this way one of the passes isdispensed with.

Diagram G76.3

Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G76

© MTS GmbH 1998 79

5.6 Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour G76

Function The command G76 serves to program a cross (square) roughing cycle forrectangular workpiece contours. The cycle may be used in internal as well asexternal machining.

NC Block G76X... Z... S.../D...

[I...] [K...] [H...W...] [R...V...] [L...]

Addresses X, Z End point coordinates

S Number of cutting passes - D may be programmed as an alternative.

D After each pass the tool is adjusted in direction Z by the value programmedat D (S may be programmed as an alternative.) During execution the actualdepth of cut may be different from the programmed value D, depending onthe optional programming of addresses R, V and L.(see optional programming of addresses R, V and L)

Optional Addresses I, K Finishing allowances in X (as related to the radius) and Z

H, W Chip-breaking (see Cross Roughing Cycle G66)The address H determines the distance travelled by the tool along the X-axisbefore the cut is interrupted, the address W determines the distance bywhich the tool moves back after the interruption. The addresses W and Hmust always be programmed as a combination.

R Degression of cutting depth (see Diagram G76.2)The value by which the infeed D is reduced with each pass is programmed atR.If R is programmed D and V must also be programmed.

V Minimum cutting depth (see Diagram G76.2)At address V the minimum cutting depth is determined. In this way the cuttingdepth D, while reduced by the degression will not be smaller than value V.If V is programmed D and R must also be programmed.

L Optimizing the remaining cuts (see Diagram G76.3)At address L an integral percentage (between 1 and 100) of the cutting depthD is programmed. The control system will compute the depth of cut toremove the remaining stock, increasing the infeed by a maximum of thepercentage programmed at L, in order to dispense with one cutting passwhen feeding down to the programmed finish.

Explanation When the cycle is invoked, the starting point is determined by the initial position ofthe tool. Accounting for the finishing allowances I and K a right-angled contour willbe turned by removing the stock of material represented by the rectangular squarein Diagram G76.2).The number of passes required can either be programmed ataddress S or may be computed by the NC system after the infeed D and if desired,after the optional addresses R, V and L have been specified.

Programming Hints The feedrate and the cutting speed must have been programmed in a precedingNC block.As the first infeed is executed from the initial tool position (the starting point), whenthe cycle is invoked the tool must be positioned in the direction X, either above(outside) the external diameter of the blank or below (inside) the internal diameter,depending on whether external or internal machining is required.

G78 Clearance Cutting Cycle


Clearance Cut Type E


N110 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+01 O306

Diagram G78.1

Clearance Cut Type F


N170 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+02 O306

Diagram G78.2

Clearance Cutting Cycle G78

© MTS GmbH 1998 81

5.7 Clearance Cutting Cycle: G78

(in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F)

Function The G78 command serves to program clearance cutting cycles in compliance withthe German standard DIN 509 type E or type F, as well as thread undercutsaccording to DIN 76 . The type of cut to be executed is determined by the controlsystem, depending on which addresses have been programmed.

The only difference in geometry between clearance cuts type E and F is determinedby parameter t2 (see Diagrams G78.1 and G78.2). With specific addresscombinations the dimensions of the clearance cut can be programmed as desired(see table below).

Cross Reference Conversely, a clearance cut programmed as a G85 cycle depends on theworkpiece diameter.

NC Block G78X... Z... L... O... [D...] [I...]

Addresses X X-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed.

Z Z-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed.

L The clearance cut is determined by the DIN parameter L :

L01: clearance cut according to DIN 509 type EL02: clearance cut according to DIN 509 type F

O At address O the clearance cut geometry is programmed (see table below).The value f defines the length, r defines the radii, t1 defines the depth and t2(with type F only) defines the machining allowance of the clearance cut:

f r t1 t2 (with type F only)

O101 0.5 0.1 0.1 0.1

O102 1.0 0.2 0.1 0.1

O204 2.0 0.4 0.2 0.1

O206 2.0 0.6 0.2 0.1

O306 2.5 0.6 0.3 0.2

O410 4.0 1.0 0.4 0.3

O210 2.5 1.0 0.2 0.1

O316 4.0 1.6 0.3 0.2

O425 5.0 2.5 0.4 0.3

O540 7.0 4.0 0.5 0.3

To the desired dimensions of the clearance cut, the applicable threedigit entrymust be made at address O.



Clearance Cut Type F and

Finishing Allowance D


N110 G78 X+40 Z-40 L+02 O306D+0.2

Diagram G78.3 : The clearance cut is shifted in the X and Z directions by the valueprogrammed at D.

At the start of a clearance cutting cyclethe tool must be positioned within thearea included by an angle of 45degrees to the following contour.

Diagram G78.4 : Tool position at the start of a clearance cutting cycle

If the programmed clearance cut is tobe executed with tool nosecompensation (TNC) in operation, theminimum angle of the approach line tothe subsequent bevelled contour mustbe 180 degrees.

Diagram G78.5: Approach angle with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation.


© MTS GmbH 1998 83

Optional Addresses D Machining allowanceThe rounded transitions of the clearance cut are shifted in the directions Xand Z by the value programmed at D (see Diagram G78.3).

I Grinding allowanceThe grinding allowance must be accounted for when the starting point isprogrammed.

Programming Hints To ensure that the clearance cutting cycle is executed according to theprogrammed dimensions it is advisable to ensure that the starting point has beencorrectly programmed (see diagrams G78.4 and G78.5). Due to the relatively smalldimensions concerned we also recommend the programming of tool nosecompensation (see G41/G42).

The control system will automatically execute an internal clearance cut,accounting for the tooling quadrant (see Compensation Values).

G78 Thread Undercut


Thread Undercut

in Compliance with DIN76


N170 G78 X+40 Z-40 I+2 K+8

Diagram G78.6

Thread Undercut G78

© MTS GmbH 1998 85

5.8 Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 76

Function If the G78 command and its addresses X, Z, I and K are programmed, a threadundercut in compliance with DIN 76 will be executed.

NC Block G78X... Z... I... K...

Addresses X X-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed

Z Z-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed

I Depth of cut relative to the radius

K Length of the clearance cut. Only positive values programmed at K are valid.

Programming Hints Please note that due to the geometry of a clearance cut, the value determining thelength K must be at least 2,34 times the value I determining the depth.

The radius r is computed by the control system, according to the cutting depth I.The radius will always be at a ratio of 0.6 of the programmed depth.

Cross Reference The G78 cycle with its addresses X, Z, I and K is identical to the thread undercutG85 with the same addresses.

G79 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides



N145 G00 X+42 Z-7

N150 G79 X+34 Z-20 A+1 W+1

I+3 K+1.5 D+7 J+2

Diagram G79.1 : Recessing cycle with chamfers at the upper edges of the recess androundings at the bottom.


N145 G00 X+42 Z-7

N150 G79 X+34 Z-20 H+1 R+1 I+3

K+1 D+7 J+2 O130 Q130

Diagram G79.2 : Recessing cycle with bevelled sides

The finishing allowance programmed for thefirst cutting pass is too small: the resultingrecess (dashed line) collides with theprogrammed final contour (bottomchamfers).

Diagram G79.3 : Result of a insufficient finishing allowance

Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides G79

© MTS GmbH 1998 87

5.9 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundings and bevelled sidesG79

Function The G79 cycle determines a recessing cut, including chamfers, roundings andbevelled sides. Programming of the addresses X and Z is mandantory; furtheraddresses are optional.

NC Block G79X... Z... [A.../H...] [R.../W...]

[I...] [K...] [D...] [J...] [O...] [Q...]

Addresses X, Z If D > 0 : coordinates of the left corner point of the recess.

If D < 0 : coordinates of the right corner point of the recess.

If D is not programmed, the width of recess will be determined by the toolwidth specified in the current compensation value register.

Optional Addresses A Chamfer at the upper edge of recess, length related to the Z-coordinate.

H Radius of rounding at the upper edge of the recess.

R Chamfer at the bottom edge, length related to the Z-coordinate.

W Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of the recess.

I Finishing allowance in the direction X, as related to the diameter.

K Allowance relative to the Z-coordinate.

D Width of recess:if D+ is programmed, the recess is executed to the right of the cornerpoint X,Z.if D- is programmed, the recess is executed to the left of the cornerpoint X,Z.

J Distance of the tool clearance plane in X from the workpiece beforeinvocation of the cycle invocation. The value programmed at J relates to thediameter.

O Recess side angle to the positive X-axis at the corner point X,Z.(see Diagram G79.2). The angle, specified in tenths of a degree, must notexceed 45°. When no bevel is programmed, the address value will be set toO=0 .

Q Recess side angle to the positive X-axis at the side opposite to the cornerpoint X,Z. (see Diagram G79.2). The angle, specified in tenths of a degree,must not exceed 45°. When no bevel is programmed, the address value willbe set to Q=0 .

Explanation Starting from the actual tool position at cycle invocation (starting point), therectangular recess (as indicated by the dashed lines in Diagram G79.2) is cut in thefirst pass, accounting for the programmed finishing allowances I and K. In thesecond pass the recess is cut to the finished size as programmmed at X/Z and D,including the execution of eventual chamfers, roundings and bevelled sides.

Programming Hints If one of addresses A, H, R, W, O, or Q is programmed, also the finishingallowances I and K must also be programmed. In so doing the values programmedat I and K must be at least equal to the specified chamfer length or rounding radius,to avoid gouging the finished contour (see Diagram G79.3).

G81 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour


5.10 Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour G81

The parameters of the cycle G81 have been extended compared to version 5.x.Additionally optional addresses E, A, O and Q have been included.

Function With the command G81 a cycle to machine straight roughing (parallel to Z axis)can be programmed with any connecting contour. The cycle can be used for insideas well as for outside machining.

NC-Command G81 I... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]

Addresses I Infeed (referring to the radius)The infeed I indicates the infeed movement value to be taken after each cutin direction X.When processing cycles the infeed can deviate from the programmed valuedepending on the optional addresses R, V and L.

Optional

Addresses

X, Z Coordinates of the contour starting pointIf these coordinates are not being programmed the end point of the firstinfeed commands after the cycle call (G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72, G72)is considered as the contour starting point.

R Degression of cutting depthThe address R is for programming the infeed value I by which the infeedmovement is to be reduced after each cut. If R is programmed, V has to beprogrammed as well.

V Minimum infeedThe address V is for programming the minimum infeed value. If V has beenprogrammed it means that the Degression of cutting depth R reduces theinfeed value I at maximum up to the value V. If V has been programmed Rhas to be programmed as well.

H Chip breaking, infeed interruption in Z directionH gives the length of the line in direction Z after which the infeed movementis interrupted for chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together.

W Chip breaking, return path of the tool in direction ZW specifies the path the tool returns after chip breaking. H and W have to beprogrammed together.

L Final roughing optimizingThe address L is for programming the non-fraction percentage value (1 <= L=< 100) of the infeed I. The control increases then the last roughing level atmaximum by the percentage programmed under L if this enables to turn thework part to the next level (Z axis-parallel contour) in one machining run.

E Recessing angle of the toolIf no recessing angle has been programmed the control calculates its valuebased on the values of correction value storage of the currently selected tool.

A Withdrawal angle of the toolIf no withdrawal angle has been programmed the control calculates its valuebased on the values of the correction value storage of the currently selectedtool.

FPlease note:

It is possible that the contour to be machined with the cycle in question iseventually modified by the programming of the angles E and A. In such a casethere might be a remaining chip left over. Therefore, the system displays thefollowing warning: �Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool�.

Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour G81

© MTS GmbH 1998 89

O Deactivating path optimizing

O1 As a standard function the cycle G81 optimizes travel paths of thetool with reference to the actual work part. Thus so-called �emptymoves� are eliminated. This standard function can be switched offby entering O1; this means no travel path optimizing is carried out.

Q Deactivating contour strings-up after each roughing level

Q1 When processing the cycle G81 the tool follows the contour path upto the preceding roughing level as a standard. This function can beswitched off by setting Q1. The tool is then withdrawn from theroughing level immediately after completing the contour withoutcontour follow-up.

Programming

hints

The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cyclecall G81 or in the first NC block with path command. In the subsequent NC blocksthe path of the complete contour is being described. Machining takes place on thiscontour. The contour description is completed with command G80, and at thesame time the machining of the cycle is started. By setting a limiting window it ispossible to fade out part of the contour for machining.

Immediately after the cycle G81 has been programmed the simulator is able to usea previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G81, as analternative to the description of the contour. This is possible with the commandG51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary toprogram the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window(also see cycle G80).

The cycle G81 then works out exactly those parts of the programmed nominalcontour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it may occur that thenominal contour is split into several contour sections. The cycle then processesthose contour sections which can be machined with the selected tool.

When declining contour sections or undercuts with a small finishing allowance arebeing machined it is necessary to select tool nose compensation. In such a caseG41 or G42 needs to be called with the cycle G81 immediately after the NC block,i.e. prior to programming the contour. The tool nose compensation is to beswitched off after contour description, prior to the cycle call G81. The cycle G81uses the work part contour for the definition of the cutting radius compensation bycalculating the mathematical equidistant in distance of the cutting radius of the toolapplied. The equidistant is then used for the definition of the travel paths of thetool. This procedure corresponds to a free preview when calculating the

cutting radius compensation.

A finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed withcommand G57.

If the diameter of the current tool for outside machining is larger or for insidemachining smaller than the diameter of the final point of the programmed contourat the moment the cycle G81 is being called, the contour is extended to the outsideor to the inside respectively up to the diameter of the current tool position.

Programming

example

Programming of a

nominal contour

G51 and a limiting

window G80 for

straight roughing

with G81

...N010 G51 X+0 Z+0 O+1N011 G71 X+35 Z+0N012 ......... description of the nominal contour ......N050 G50N051 G81 I+4N052 G80 X+5 Z-80...



Straight roughing

cycle with any

contour

(outside machining)

= starting point (currenttool position whencalling the cycle)

= programmed startingpoint of the contour

= contour points(description of thecontour)

Programming

example

Straight roughing

cycle

for any contour

(outside machining)

...N145 G00 X+50 Z+5N150 G81 X+18 Z+3 I+7N155 G42N160 ......... description of the contour ......N215 G40N220 G80...

Straight roughing

cycle for any

contour

(inside machining)

= starting point(current tool positionwhen calling thecycle)

= programmed contourstarting point


Programming

example

Straight roughing

cycle

for any contour

(inside machining)

...N345 G00 X+8 Z+6N350 G81 X+76 Z+4 I+7N355 G41N360 ......... description of the contour ......N415 G40N420 G80...


© MTS GmbH 1998 91

Infeed interruption

for chip breaking of

straight roughing

cycle.

H specifies for chip breaking the string after which the infeed is interrupted in eachcase. W specifies the string the tool is withdrawn before starting to machine againthe string specified under H.

Final roughing

optimizing

a) Cutting division

without final

cutting

optimizing

b) Cutting division

with final

roughing

optimizing

= final roughingoptimized roughinglevel

Programming

example

Final roughing

optimizing

Infeed I=4 mmFinal roughing optimizing L=25%

Final roughing optimizing for cycle G81 considers for optimizing Z- parallelelements of a programmed contour string. Without final roughing optimizing (a) thecycle is run 5 times for the contour. Using the final roughing optimizing, however,the infeed is increased by 25 % up to maximum 5 mm, if this possible to machinein this way the following Z-parallel contour element. In the following exampleconsequently the cuts 1 and 4 are being optimized (b). Herewith one machiningrun less is required.



Recessing angle E

for outside

machining

a) recessing angle

E is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour �

b) recessing angle

E is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour�

= programmed contour

= maximum contourpossible to realize

= remaining finalroughing volume

The recessing angle E plays an important role for the programming of the�descending contour�. Its value depends on the type of the tool holder applied, andit is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool.

When using the command G81, E can be programmed separately as well. In thiscase the cycle uses the value E stored under G81 instead of the respective valuestored in the correction value register of the tool.

To be able to generate a descending contour with a tool the recessing angle E hasto be larger than the angle of the �descending contour� (a).

If the recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the �descending contour� theprogrammed contour cannot be machined with the selected tool.(b). Whenprocessing the cycle only the contour which at maximum can be machined with thecurrent tool is realized. Hereby a final roughing volume remains. In such a case thefollowing warning is displayed: �Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool�.

Recessing angle for

inside machining

a) recessing angle

E is larger than

the angle of the

�falling contour�


© MTS GmbH 1998 93

b) recessing angle

E is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour�


= maximum contour tobe realized


Withdrawal angle

for outside

machining

a) withdrawal angle

A is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�

b) withdrawal angle

A is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�


= maximum contour tobe generated


The withdrawal angle A plays an important role for the programming of the�ascending contour with undercuts�. It depends on the type of the currently appliedtool holder and is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool.

When using the command G81 it is possible to program A separately as well. Thecycle then uses the value A programmed under G81 instead of the value stored inthe correction value register of the tool

To be able to generate an ascending contour with a tool the withdrawal angle A hasto be larger than the angle of the �ascending contour (a)�.

If the descending angle A is smaller than the angle of the �ascending contour withundercuts� the programmed contour cannot be machined with the selected tool (b).Therefore, when processing the cycle only the maximum possible contour isrealized. This means that a final roughing volume remains. In such a case thefollowing warning is displayed: �Contour cannot be fully machined with the tool�.



a) withdrawal angle

A is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�

b) withdrawal angle

A is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�




Programming

example

Recessing and

withdrawal angle

for straight

roughing cycle G81

...N25 G00 X+90 Z+10N30 G57 +1N35 G81 X+20 Z+2 I+5 E+45 A+45N40 G42N45 G01 Z+0...N90 G40N95 G80

In the first machining phase of this example the programmed contour is roughedwith a corner turning tool (reversible tips Type S, end tool entering angle 45°) indepth of 1 mm (see the next figure).


© MTS GmbH 1998 95

Using recessing

and withdrawal

angle for the

programming of a

straight roughing

cycle G81

(roughing of the

contour)

During interactive programming the CNC simulator indicates that the programmedcontour cannot be machined completely with this tool. In the graphic representationthe actually roughed area is highlighted in color.

In the second machining phase the contour is roughed with a further corner turningtool. Here as well, the CNC simulator highlights in color the area which has actuallybeen roughed (see the next figure). Like for roughing the cycle optimizes the travelpaths automatically., so that �empty moves� are avoided.

Using recessing

and withdrawal

angle for

programming a

straight roughing

cycle G81 (finishing

of contour)



Travel path

optimizing for

straight roughing

cycle G81

a) G81 with travel

path optimizing

(standard)

= premachined contour

= cut-out material section area

If optimizing is activated the cycle calculates the diameter of the outer materialedge in the roughing area and starts the infeed I from this outer edge. Theroughing paths including their dimensions are hereby placed on the materialsection area to be roughed and all travel paths outside of this area are optimized.This travel path optimizing which is activated as a standard function enables toeliminate the so-called �empty moves� when using the straight roughing cycle G81.

b) G81 without

travel path

optimizing

= Area of the so-called �empty moves� created through deactivated travel path optimizing(optional address O1)



If travel path optimizing has been deactivated the first infeed I starts from thecurrent tool position or from the outer edge of limiting window stored under G80.


© MTS GmbH 1998 97

Contour sequences

for straight

roughing cycle G81

a) G81 without

contour

sequences after

each roughing

level

= if contour sequence function (optional address Q1) is deactivated the �corners� remainunfinished after each roughing level

b) G81 with

contour

sequences after

each roughing

level (standard)

Due to activated contour sequences after each roughing level as a standard settingthe edges created by straight roughing cycle G81 are avoided.

G82 Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour


5.11 Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour G82

The parameters of the cycle G82 have been extended compared with the version5.x. Furthermore, the addresses E, A, O and Q have been added as well.

Function With the command G82 the cycle for roughing in plane direction (parallel to X axis)is programmed with any connecting contour. G82 can be used for both inside andoutside machining.

NC-Command G82 K... [X... Z...] [R... V...] [H... W...] [L...] [E...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]

Addresses K InfeedK indicates the infeed value in Z direction after each cut.

When processing the cycle the infeed value can deviate from theprogrammed values, because its value depends on the address values C, Vand L..

Optional

Addresses

X, Z Coordinates of the contour starting pointIf these coordinates have not been programmed the end point of the firsttravel command (G00, G01, G02, G03, G71, G72, G72) after the cycle callbecomes the contour starting point.

R Degression of cutting depthThe decrease value for the infeed K after each cut is stored under theaddress C.

V Minimum infeedThe minimum infeed value is stored under the address V. The programmedvalue V specifies the minimum value to which infeed value K is reduced bythe decrease value C. If V has been programmed, C has to be programmedas well.

H Chip breaking, infeed interruption in X directionH specifies the length of the string in X direction after which the infeed isinterrupted for chip breaking. H and W have to be programmed together.

W Chip breaking, tool returns in X directionW specifies the string the tool returns after chip breaking. H and W have tobe programmed together.

L Final roughing optimizingA non-fraction percentage (1 <= L <= 100) of the infeed K is programmedunder L. This value is used by the control to increase the infeed for the lastroughing level at maximum by the percentage stored under L in case it ispossible in this way to machine the work part in one machining run to thenext machining level (contour path parallel to X axis).

A Recessing angle of the auxiliary cutting edge of the toolIf no recessing angle has been programmed the control calculates its valuebased on the entries in the correction value register of the currently selectedtool..

E Withdrawal angle of the main cutting edge of the toolIf no withdrawal angle has been programmed the control calculates its valuebased on the entries in the correction value register of the currently selectedtool.

FPlease note:

The contour string processed by the cycle is modified by the programming of theangle E and A. As in such a case eventually a residual roughing remains thefollowing warning might be displayed: �Contour cannot be fully machined with thetool�.

Cross Roughing Cycle with any Contour G82

© MTS GmbH 1998 99

O Deactivating travel movement optimizingO1 In general, the cycle G82 optimizes the travel path of the tool withreference to the work part. This function can be switched off by setting O1.i. e. no travel path optimizing takes place.

Q Deactivating contour strings after each roughing levelQ1 When processing the cycle G82 the tool follows, as a standard, thecontour string up to the preceding roughing level. This function can beswitched off by setting Q1. The tool is then withdrawn from the roughing levelimmediately after completing the contour without following the contour.

Programming

hints

The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cyclecall G82 or in the first NC block of the travel command. The subsequent NC blocksdescribe the path of the full contour to be machined. The command G80completes the contour description and also starts the processing of the cycle. WithG80 it is possible to exclude from machining part of the contour by switching it offwith the limiting window.

Immediately after the cycle G82 has been programmed the simulator is able to usea previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G82, as analternative to the description of the contour. This can be done with the commandG51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary toprogram the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window(also see cycle G80).

The cycle G82 then processes only those parts of the programmed nominalcontour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it might occur that thenominal contour is split into several contour sections by the limiting window. Thecycle consequently generates only those contour sections which can be machinedwith the selected tool.

If machining takes place with tool nose compensation G41 or G42 have to becalled immediately after the NC block with the cycle G82, i. e. prior to theprogramming of the contour. The selection of the tool nose compensation is to beplaced after the contour description and prior to the cycle call G80.

Finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed with thecommand G57.

If the diameter of the current tool position is in case of outside machining largeror in case of inside machining smaller than the diameter of the end point of theprogrammed contour at the moment the cycle G82 is being called, then the endpoint will be extended parallel to the axis respectively either to the outside or insideup to the diameter of the current tool position.



Straight roughing

cycle with any

contour

(outside machining)




Programming

example

Straight roughing

cycle with any

contour (outside

machining)

...N045 G00 X+75 Z+2N050 G82 X+72 Z-35 K+5N055 G41N060 ......... description of the contour ......N115 G40N120 G80...

Plane roughing

cycle with any

contour

(inside machining)




Programming

example

Plane roughing

cycle for any

contour (inside

machining)

...N345 G00 X+10 Z+5N350 G82 X+15 Z-50 K+7N355 G42N360 ......... description of the contour ......N415 G40N420 G80...


© MTS GmbH 1998 101

Infeed interruption

for chip breaking in

plane roughing

For chip breaking H specifies the path after which the infeed is interrupted in eachcase. W specifies the path the tool returns before starting a new path H as aninfeed.

Final roughing

optimizing

a) cutting division

without final

roughing

optimizing

= Residual infeed ofthe last machiningrun


b) cutting division

with final

roughing

optimizing

= first and last infeedafter final roughingoptimizing


Recessing angle for

machining outside

a) the recessing

angle A is larger

than the angle of

the �descending

contour with

under-cuts�

= machining direction



b) the recessing

angle A is

smaller than the

angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�: a

residual chip

remains


= maximum possiblecontour which canbe generated

= remaining chip restvolume


The recessing angle A is an important entity for the programming of �descendingcontours�. It is directly related to the type of the tool holder applied and is stored inthe correction value register of the corresponding tool.

When using the command G82 it is possible to program E separately. In this casethe cycle then uses the value A programmed in G82 instead of the, by 0,5°corrected, value from the correction value register of the tool.

To be able to create a descending contour with a tool the recessing angle A needsto be larger than the angle of the �descending contour� (a).

If the recessing angle A is smaller than the angle of the �descending contour� theprogrammed contour cannot be realized with the selected tool (b). In this case,when working out the cycle, only the maximum contour possible to be machinedwith the selected tool is therefore realized. Hereby a residual cutting volumeremains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: �Contour cannot be fullymachined with the tool�.

Recessing angle for

inside machining

a) recessing angle

A is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

under-cuts�


b) recessing angle

A is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour with

undercuts�: a

residual chip

remains



= remaining rest cuttingvolume



© MTS GmbH 1998 103

Withdrawal angle

for outside

machining

a) withdrawal angle

E is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour�


b) withdrawal angle

E is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

angle with

undercuts�: a

residual chip

remains





The withdrawal angle E is an important entity for the programming of �ascendingcontours with undercuts�. It is directly connected with the type of the tool appliedand it is stored in the correction value register of the corresponding tool.

When using the command G82 it is possible to program E separately. In this casethe cycle then uses the value A programmed in G82 instead of the by 0,5°corrected value from the correction value register of the tool.

To be able to realize an ascending contour with a tool the withdrawal angle A needsto be larger than the angle of the �ascending contour� (a).

If the recessing angle E is smaller than the angle of the �ascending contour withundercuts � the programmed contour cannot be realized with the selected tool (b).In this case, when working out the cycle, only the maximum contour possible to bemachined with the selected tool is therefore realized. Hereby a rest cutting volumeremains. In such a case the following warning is displayed: �Contour cannot be fullymachined with the tool�.



Withdrawal angle

for inside

machining

a) withdrawal angle

E is larger than

the angle of the

�descending

contour�


b) withdrawal angle

E is smaller than

the angle of the

�descending

contour�: a

residual chip

remains





Optimizing travel

path in plane

roughing cycle G82

of a premachined

work part

a) G82 with travel

path optimizing

(standard)


= the maximum contour machinable with the current tool


If travel path optimizing has been activated the cycle calculates the Z coordinate ofthe outer material edge in the roughing area and starts the infeed I from this outeredge. The roughing paths including their dimensions are hereby placed on thematerial section area to be roughed and all travel paths outside of this area areoptimized. This travel path optimizing, which is activated as a standard function,enables to eliminate the so-called �empty moves� when using the plane roughingcycle G82.


© MTS GmbH 1998 105

b) G82 without

travel path

optimizing

= Area of so-called �empty moves� created by deactivated travel pathoptimizing (optional address O1)


= the maximum contour machinable with the current tool


If travel path optimizing has been deactivated the first infeed I starts from thecurrent tool position or from the outer edge of the limiting window stored underG80.

Contour sequences

of plane roughing

cycle G82

a) G82 without

contour

sequences after

each roughing

step

= if contour sequence (optional address Q1) is not activated the �corners�remain unfinished after each roughing step



b) G82 with

contour

sequences after

each roughing

step (standard)

Due to activated contour sequences after each roughing step as a standard settingof the plane roughing cycle G82 unfinished �corners� are avoided.

Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80

© MTS GmbH 1998 107

5.12 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80

Function The command G80 executes the most recently programmed cycle. When usingG80 it is possible to specify an optional rectangle limiting window for the cyclesG81, G82 and G87.

By placing the limiting window, part of the contour area programmed after the cyclecall G81, G82 or G87 can be faded out. If no contour was programmed betweenthe cycle call (G81, G82 or G87) in that case the contour to be machined is fadedout in the window from the full work part contour which was programmed with G51.If no contour was programmed an error message is displayed.

When placing a limiting window the window edge has to be placed in the infeeddirection in front of the material edge or exactly on the material edge. If this is notthe case, the control would try to feed in into the material and would so cause acollision.

NC-Command G80 [X... Z...] [I... K...]

Optional

Addresses

X, Z Coordinates of the first corner point of the limiting window

If X and Z have not been programmed no limiting window can be used.

I, K Coordinates of the second corner point of the limiting window

If I and K have not been programmed the control automatically takes thecurrent tool position as the second corner point of the limiting window whenprogramming X and Z.

FFPlease, note that the coordinate X has to be programmed as a diameter,the coordinate I, however, as a radius.

Programming a

limiting window for

cycle processing

= starting point(current tool position when calling the cycle)

= first corner point of the limiting window

= second corner point of the limiting window

= material to be cut off

= contour of the finished part programmed with G51

G80 Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle)


Programming

example

Programming

limiting window for

cycle processing

...N345 G00 X+100 Z+5N350 G81 I+4N355 G42N360 ......... contour description ......N415 G40N420 G80 X+40 Z-75 I+50 K-42...

The following figures demonstrate the two alternative ways to use the limitingwindow. Hereby the full contour was programmed as a nominal contour using theG51 command. The called straight roughing cycle G81 optimizes the travel paths toavoid so-called �empty moves�.

Calling straight

roughing cycle G81

with the NC

command G80

Alternative 1:

G80 X+5 Z-75

= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle) = second cornerpoint of the limiting window


= limiting window


= full contour programmed with G51 (nominal contour)

Processing Cycle (Last Specified Cycle) G80

© MTS GmbH 1998 109

Calling straight

roughing cycle G81

with the NC

command G80,

after having

prorogued the work

part already

Alternative 2:

G80 X+40 Z-75 I+50

K-42

= starting point (current tool position when calling the cycle)


= second corner point of the limiting window

= limiting window


= full contour programmed with G51 (nominal contour)

G83 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle



N165 G00 X+55 Z+21N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6N175 G42N180 (Contour description)

òN235 G40N240 G80

Diagram G83.1: Contouring Cycle G83

In this example, depending on the position of thestarting point relative to the first contour point,programming of infeed K will reduce the number ofcutting passes required.

Given the same values at I and K but with adifferent starting point, the infeed distance I isgreater and consequently results in a reduction ofcutting passes.

Diagram G83.2: If addresses I and K are programmed, the control system will select aninfeed which results in a reduction of cutting passes.

Pattern of recesses at a constant

distance


N295 G00 X+052.100 Z-043.600N300 G83 X+052.100 Z-063.600 K+010

N305 G79 X+047 Z-063.600 I+001 K+001 A+001 W+001 O110 Q110N310 G80

Diagram G83.3 : Recessing cycle G79 as part of the contouring cycle G83

Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle G83

© MTS GmbH 1998 111

5.13 Contouring Cycle/Multipass Cycle G83

Function Motion commands or further cycles programmed between the G83 command andthe G80 command (which terminates the cycle) will be multiply executed,depending on the programmed infeed. In this way the G83 command can beemployed to effect a contouring cycle, e.g. in the machining of pre-fabricated blanksor with internal machining. A sequence of recesses at constant distances can alsobe executed.

NC Block G83X... Z... I... K...

Addresses X X-coordinate of the first point of the contour, related to the diameter

Z Z-coordinate of the first point of the contour

I Infeed in X, as related to the radius

K Infeed in Z

Explanation With contouring the infeed motion starts at the initial tool position (starting position)and proceeds to the first (starting) point of the contour, as programmed in the G83NC block. The depth of cut in direction X and Z is programmed at the address I orK. If both addresses are programmed, the control system will execute that cuttingdepth which results in the smallest number of passes - which of the addresses isselected will depend on the starting position of the tool as related to theprogrammed start of the contour (see Diagram G83.2).

Following the G83 command the appropriate motion commands (contourdescription) or cycles initiates must be programmed. G80 completes the contourdescription and starts the cycle execution.

Example Recessing Cycle (G79): recesses cuts at a constant distance(see Diagram G83.3):

N295 G00 X+052.100 Z-043.600N300 G83 X+052.100 Z-063.600 K+010N305 G79 X+047 Z-063.600 I+001 K+001 A+001 W+001 O110 Q110N310 G80

After each cutting pass the tool is adjusted in direction Z by K=10 (NC Block N300),relative to the programmed start of the contour. After each feed adjustment therecessing cycle G79 is executed, resulting in two recesses at a distance of 10 mm.

Programming Hints If tool nose compensation is to be selected during machining, G42 or G41 must beinvoked immediately after the cycle command G83 and prior to the travelcommands. Tool nose compensation must be canceled (by G40) before the cycle isterminated (by G80).

FWith multipass cycles it is advisable to program the tool path limitation G36.Particularly when internal cuts are executed, this range limitation is indispensable.See next page for an explanation of the G36 command.

G36 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles



N165 G00 X+55 Z+21N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6N175 G42N180 (Contour Description)

òN235 G40N240 G80

Diagram G36.1: Contouring Cycle G83 without Travel Range Limitation


N165 G00 X+55 Z+21N170 G83 X+10 Z+3 I+6N175 G36N180 G42N185 (Contour Description)

òN240 G40N245 G80

Diagram G36.2 Contouring Cycle G83 with Travel Range Limitation


N110 G83 X+45 Z+21 I+3.2N115 G36N120 G36N125 G41N130 (Contour Description)

òN195 G40N200 G80

Diagram G36.3 Travel Range Limitation with Internal Machining

Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles G36

© MTS GmbH 1998 113

5.14 Travel Range Limitation for Multipass Cycles G36

Function The G36 command can be used to limit the tool path range whenever thecontouring cycle G83 or other multipass cycles are programmed.

NC Block G36

Explanation The contouring cycle G83 effects the execution of multiple cutting passes along theprogrammed contour, the number of passes being dependent of the programmeddepth of cut. As shown in Diagram G36.1, part of the tool motion is outside theworkpiece contour. The G36 command limits the range of tool motions, in order toreduce the machining time (see Diagram G36.2). With relief cuts, however, thismay result in collisions when the tool plunge is too deep.

Travel range limitation is of special importance when internal contouring isprogrammed, because travelling along the complete contour would result in acollision (see Diagram G36.3).

The G36 command limits the travel range to the quadrant opposite the tool tip.

The actual path limitation is dependent on the programmed start of the contour:

- when the tool position is higher than the start of the contour, no tool motionsabove the programmed X-coordinate will be executed (Diagram G36.2).

- when the tool position is lower than the start of the contour, no tool motionsbelow the programmed X-coordinate will be executed (Diagram G36.3).

Programming Hints The G36 command must be programmed after the NC block invocating the G83cycle.

If a finishing allowance G57 is programmed before the start of the cycle, theprogrammed value must be taken into account when determining the startingposition of the tool.

G84 Deep Drilling Cycle



N135 G01 X+0 Z+10

N140 G84 Z-130 A+0.5 B+1 D+15 K+50

Diagram G84.1

Deep Drilling Cycle G84

© MTS GmbH 1998 115

5.15 Deep Drilling Cycle G84

Function The G84 command serves to execute the drilling of a hole by a number of repeatedcutting operations.

NC Block G84 Z... A... B... D... K...

Addresses Z Z-coordinate of the end point.

A Dwell time (sec) after tool retraction for chip-removal

B Dwell time (sec) for chip-breaking

D Degression:The drilling depth K is reduced after each drilling pass by the valueprogrammed at D. It may not, however, fall short of D

K Drilling depth of the first pass.

Explanation The G84 command defines a deep drilling cycle.

Example (see Diagram G84.1):In the given example the total drilling depth, programmed at Z, is Z = 130 mm.The depth of the first drilling is K = 50 mm. With each of the following passesthe depth K is reduced by the value D = 15 mm (Degression). It may not,however, fall short of D. For chip-breaking the feed motion is interrupted aftereach drilling pass for the specified dwell time B; for chip-removal the tool isretracted to the clearance plane where it remains for the specified dwell time.The remaining depth to be drilled is computed by the control system and dividedinto two equal final cuts (in the given example 5 mm for each pass).

Programming Hints The applicable feedrate and speed must be programmed in a preceding NC block.



Clearance Cut Type E


N210 G85 X+40 Z-40

Diagram G85.1

Clearance Cut Type F


N270 G85 X+40 Z-40 K+0

Diagram G85.2


© MTS GmbH 1998 117

5.16 Clearance Cutting Cycle G85

in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F

Function The G85 command serves to program clearance cutting cycles in compliance withthe German standard DIN 509 type E or type F, as well as thread undercutsaccording to DIN 76 . The type of cut to be executed is determined by the controlsystem, depending on which addresses have been programmed.

The only difference in geometry between clearance cuts types E and F of isdetermined by the parameter t2 (see Diagram G85.1 and G85.2). Dimension valuessuch as length, depth, rounding radius and machining allowance will be dependenton the diameter of the workpiece at the programmed corner point(see the table below).

Cross Reference If a clearance cut is programmed as a G78 cycle, the dimensions of the cut can beprogrammed at wiil, as long as they remain within a range of pre-defineddimensions.

NC Block G85X... Z... [K...] [D...] [I...]

Addresses X X-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed.

Z Z-Coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed.

Optional Addresses K Parameters of the clearance cut:

If K is not programmed: Clearance cut according to DIN type EIf K = 0 is programmed: Clearance cut according to DIN type FIf K greater than 0 is programmed: Thread undercut / DIN 76 (see DIN)

Explanation The clearance cut is executed at the programmed corner point, with the followingdimensions, depending on the workpiece diameter:

Diameter X f r t1 t2 (type F only)

less than 18 mm 2 0,6 0,35 0,1

18 to 80 mm 2,5 0,6 0,35 0,2

more than 80 mm 4 1 0,45 0,3

f lengthr radiust1 deptht2 machining allowance (with type F only)



Clearance Cut Type F and

Finishing Allowance D


N210 G85 X+40 Z-40 D+0.2 K+0

Diagram G85.3 : The clearance cut is shifted in directions X and Z by the value programmed at D.

At the start of a clearance cutting cycle the toolmust be positioned within the area included byan angle of 45 degrees to the following contour.

Diagram G85.4 : Tool position at the invocation of a clearance cutting cycle

If the programmed clearance cut is to beexecuted with tool nose compensation (TNC) inoperation, the minimum angle of the approachline to the subsequent bevelled contour must be180 degrees.

Diagram G85.5 : Approach angle with tool nose compensation (TNC) in operation.


© MTS GmbH 1998 119

Optional Addresses D Machining allowanceThe rounded transitions of the clearance cut are shifted in the directions Xand Z by the value programmed at D (see Diagram G85.3).

I Grinding allowanceThe grinding allowance must be accounted for when the starting point isprogrammed.

Programming Hints To ensure thath the clearance cutting cycle is executed according to theprogrammed dimensions it is advisable to ensure that the starting point has beencorrectly programmed (see diagrams G78.4 and G78.5). Due to the relatively smalldimensions concerned we also recommend the programming of the tool nosecompensation (see G41/G42).

G85 Thread Undercut


Thread Undercut

in Compliance with DIN 76


N270 G85 X+40 Z-40 I+2 K+8

Diagram G85.6

Thread Undercut G85

© MTS GmbH 1998 121

5.17 Thread Undercut in Compliance with DIN 76

Function If the G85 command and its addresses X, Z, I and K are programmed, a threadundercut in compliance with DIN 76 will be executed.

NC Block G85X... Z... I... K...

Addresses X X-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed

Z Z-coordinate of the corner point at which the clearance cut is executed

I Depth of cut relative to the radius

K Length of the clearance cut. Only positive values programmed at K are valid.

Programming Hints Note: due to the geometry of a clearance cut, the value determining the length Kmust be at least 2,34 times the value I determining the depth.

The radius r is computed by the control system, according to the cutting depth I.The radius will always be at a ratio of 0.6 of the programmed depth.

Cross Reference The G85 cycle with its addresses X, Z, I and K is identical to the thread undercutG78, with the same addresses (see above p.87).

G86 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses



N250 G86 X+32 Z-20 K-8

Diagram G86.1 : Recessing Cycle G86 without finishing allowance; the recess is executed tothe left of the programmed corner point (K with a negative sign).


N195 G86 X+32 Z-20 B+1 I+0.7 K+8

Diagram G86.2 : Recessing Cycle G86 with finishing allowance (dashed line) and radius of theroundings at the bottom edges. The chamfers at the top edges of the recessare dependent on the distance between the tool and the programmed cornerpoint.

Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses G86

© MTS GmbH 1998 123

5.18 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses G86

Function The cycle G86 serves to program rectangular recesses (sides parallel to the X-axis)with chamfers at the top edge and roundings at the bottom edge.

NC Block G86X... Z... K... [B...] [I...]

Addresses X, Z If K > 0 : coordinates of the left corner point of the recessIf K < 0 : coordinates of the right corner point of the recess.

K Width of recess:If K+ is programmed, the recess is executed to the right of the corner pointX,Z.If K- is programmed, the recess is executed to the left of the corner pointX,Z.

If K is not programmed, a recess to the right of the programmed cornerpoint is executed with the tool width as specified in the compensation valueregister.

Optional Addresses B Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of the recess. If B is programmed, afinishing allowance must also be programmed at I.

I Finishing allowance related to the the diameter.

Explanation Starting from the tool position at cycle invocation (starting point), in the first passthe rectangular recess (as indicated by the dashed lines in Diagram G86.2) is cut,taking into account the programmed finishing allowance I.In the second pass the recess is cut to the finished size as programmmed at X/Zand K, including eventual roundings.When a finishing allowance I has been programmed, the tool will feed 1.3 mmalong both the left and right edges at an angle of 45°. If the distance between thetool and the workpiece is less than 1.3 mm this operation results in chamfering ofthe upper edges of the recess.

Programming Hints The absolute value programmed at address K must be greater or equal to the toolwidth stored in the compensation register.

Cross Reference The G86 recessing cycle is different from the G79 recessing cycle (see p.89) withregard to geometry and optionally programmable addresses.

G87 Recessing Cycle for any Contour


5.19 Recessing Cycle for any Contour G87

Function With the command G87 a recessing cycle is programmed. With this command anycontour can be roughed or finished. G87 can only be used with a recessing tool ora copying chisel with a round turnplate as a tool. Both straight and plane

recessing can be made.

If none of the optional switches O or Q is switched on when programming therecessing cycle G87 the following standard setting is valid for processing the cycle:

Standard settings

for processing the

cycle G87

• G87 is interpreted as a normal recessing cycle for machining straightrecessing.

• The travel path movements of the tool are optimized with reference to the rawpart to avoid so-called �empty moves�.

• The steps created after each infeed are machined immediately after the infeed.

• G87 generates a bidirectional recessing, beginning from the right to the left.This means that the recessing chisel changes the machining direction aftereach machining step.

• If the recessing contour has several valleys the machining is done step by step.This means that the control processes the recessing from one recessing levelto the other, simultaneously in all valleys. Sharp valleys within the programmedrecessing contour are machined exactly up to the depth where the width of thevalley is identical with the width of the chisel.

NC command G87 I... [X... Z...] [L...] [H...] [A...] [O...] [Q...]

Addresses I Infeed

The infeed I indicates the recessing chisel infeed value in X direction (withreference to the radius) after each cut.If a plane recessing is generated the infeed I indicates the recessing chiselinfeed value in Z direction after each cut.When finishing a recess (switch O6) I indicates the distance by which therecessing tool is withdrawn above the local maxima of the recess whenfinishing.

Optional

Addresses

X, Z Coordinates of the contour starting point.

If these coordinates have not been programmed the point of the first travelpath command after the cycle call becomes the contour starting point.

L Final roughing optimizing

A non-fraction percentage (1 <= L <= 100) of the infeed K is programmedunder L. This value is used by the control to increase the infeed for the lastroughing level at maximum by the percentage stored under L in case it ispossible in this way to machine the work part in one machining run up to thenext machining level (contour path parallel to X axis).

H Offsetting

Under the address H a recessing offset can be programmed. The non-fraction percentage (1 <= H <= 100) indicates the recessing offset in per centof the cutting width of the recessing chisel. If H is not programmed thesystem works with a standard offset default of 50 %. Correspondingly there isoverlapping with the value of 100-H in per cent of the cutting width of the tool.

A Dwell time (entry as revolving of the work part)

A indicates the dwell time after each recessing infeed.

Recessing Cycle for any Contour G87

© MTS GmbH 1998 125

Changing

machining

settings of the

cycle

The standard settings of the recessing cycle G87 can be changed by setting oneor more switches O or Q as follows:

FFPlease note that the address O can be programmed several times and in eachcase with different values within the NC command G87.

O0 Travel path optimizing

If the switch is set O0 no travel path optimizing is done for the tool movementwith reference to the raw part. Depending on the starting point of the cycle�empty moves� are correspondingly possible.

O1 Roughing

If the switch is set O1 the infeed levels calculated by the recessing cycle arebeing roughed with the recessing chisel and not tapped with the programmedset-off.

O2 Finishing of the contour

If the switch is set O2 the cycle G87 leaves the machined steps after eachinfeed without final milling to mill them at the end of the cycle only (finishingof the contour).

O3 Machining from left to right

If the switch is set O3 the recessing is machined from the left to right.

O4 Machining valley by valley or level by level

If the switch is set O4 the recessing is machined valley by valley. The controlprocesses each valley (=local recessing minimum) one by one.

Sharp valleys within the programmed recessing contour are machined by thecycle G87 up to the depth where the width of the valley and the width of theapplied recessing chisel are identical.

O5 Machining direction not bidirectional

If the switch is set O5 the programmed recessing is not machinedbidirectional but in the direction as specified with O3.

O6 Finishing/adjusting

Using the switch O6 finishing of the recess contour is programmed. Prior tousing the switch O6 recessing cycle with a finishing allowance equidistanthas to be called with the command G57 B... . Please note that the contourdescription of the recessing has to be repeated when calling prior to G87 O6.

Q1 Plane recessing

If the switch is set to Q1 the control is instructed to interpret the contour as aplane recess.



Programming

hints

The recessing cycle G87 can only be used with recessing tools or with copying

tools with round turntable. If some other tool is selected at the time of the cyclecall the following error message is displayed: �Correction values cannot bemachined�.

The starting point of the contour is programmed in the NC block with the cyclecall G87 or in the first NC block with a travel path command. The complete contourpath to be machined is specified in the subsequent NC blocks. The contourdescription is completed and at the same time the machining started with thecommand G80. When using G80 It is possible to set a window frame for a partcontour to be machined.

Immediately after the cycle G87 has been programmed the simulator is able to usea previously specified nominal contour for executing the cycle G87, as analternative to the description of the contour. This can be done with the commandG51. Hereby it is to be noted that in such a case it is absolutely necessary toprogram the cycle call G80 with the addresses X and Z for the limiting window(also see cycle G80).

The cycle G87 then processes only those parts of the programmed nominalcontour which are within the limiting window. Hereby it might occur that thenominal contour is split into several contour sections by the limiting window. Thecycle consequently generates only those contour sections which can be machinedwith the selected tool.

If machining is to take place with tool nose radius compensation G41 or G42has to be called immediately after the NC block with G87 cycle, i.e. prior to theprogramming of the contour. Switching off tool nose radius compensation has totake place after contour description, prior to the cycle call G80.

Finishing allowance (in X, Z or equidistant) can be programmed using thecommand G57.

If the diameter of the current tool position is in case of outside machining largeror in case of inside machining smaller than the diameter of the end point of theprogrammed contour at the moment the cycle G87 is being called, then the endpoint will be extended parallel to the axis respectively either to the outside or insideup to the diameter of the current tool position.

Based on the application limits of the axial recessing tools because of the diameter(from Dmin to Dmax) the following limitations apply to plane recessing:

• One plane recessing cycle G87 is allowed to have only one recessing minimum(=valley).

• If plane recessing is to include several local recessing minima (=valleys) severalsuccessive recessing cycle calls have to be programmed. In that case differenttools have to be used.

• The lowest straight line to be machined in the recess parallel to the X axis Xmin

to Xmax has to overlap with the range of application diameter of the tool Dmin toDmax at minimum by the width of the recessing tool.


© MTS GmbH 1998 127

Plane recessing

with two local

recessing minima

Recessing 1 with onelocal recessingminimum

Recessing 2 with onelocal recessingminimum

Recessing chisel 1 formachiningrecessing 1

Recessing chisel 2 formachiningrecessing 2

The full plane recessing contour as described in the above figure can only becreated with two successive recessing cycles as the contour has more than onelocal recessing minimum.

Plane recess:

recess into solid

material (a)

= overlapping area

The plane recess described in the above figure can be machined with the selectedrecessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of the tool overlapsthe lowest-located straight line in the recess, parallel to X axis, Xmax - Xmin by morethan the width of the recessing tool

Plane recess:

recess into solid

material (b)

= overlapping area

The plane recess described in the above figure can be just and just machined withthe selected recessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of thetool is exactly as wide as the lowest-located straight line in the recess to bemachined, Xmax - Xmin, parallel to X axis, by more than the width of the recessingtool.



Plane recess:

recess into solid

material (c)

= overlapping area

The recess described in the above figure cannot be machined with the selectedrecessing tool as the range of application diameter Dmax - Dmin of the tool overlapsthe lowest-located straight line to be machined in the recess, Xmax - Xmin, parallel tothe X axis, by less than the width of the recessing tool.

NC addresses when

programming a

recessing cycle -

(straight recessing)



= enlarged detail of thecutting edge of therecessing tool

= travel movements ofthe recessing tool(bidirectionalmachining from theright to the left (andalways changing themachining direction)

Machining is carried out bidirectionally (standard) starting form the right to the leftand always changing the machining direction.

Programming

example

Recessing cycle

(straight recess)

...N045 G00 X+110 Z+5N050 G57 B+1N055 G87 X+100 Z-90 I+5 H+20N060 ......... Description of the contour......N120 G80...


© MTS GmbH 1998 129

Roughing (O1) with

recessing cycle G87

(straight recess)


= roughing (switch 01)of the first infeedplane

Roughing is carried out bidirectionally (standard), starting from the right to the left orstarting from the left to the right (switch O3) and always changing the machiningdirection.If the optional switch O5 (machining not bidirectional) has been switched on therecessing cycle machines also roughing in the machining direction only as definedwith O3.

Final finishing of

the contour (02) in

recessing cycle G87

(straight recess)

Machining direction

from the right (03)

to the left in

recessing cycle G87

(straight recess)



= Travel movements ofthe recessing tool



Machining is carried out bidirectionally (standard), starting form the left to the rightand then always changing the machining direction.If the optional switch O5 (machining not bidirectional) has been switched on therecessing cycle machines only from the left to the right without changing themachining direction.

Partial machining

(04) in recessing

cycle G87 (straight

recess)

Finishing (O6) in

recessing cycle G87

(straight recess)

Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88

© MTS GmbH 1998 131

5.20 Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88

The previous cycles G87 (radius) and G88 (chamfer) in the version 5.x werecombined to one cycle G88 in the version 6.

Function With the cycle G88 it is possible to make radiusing or to chamfer in lines parallel tothe axis. Hereby it is possible to go to the transition radius or to the chamfertogether with the tangenting contour elements or separately one by one.

NC command G88 X... Z... R...

Addresses X, Z Coordinates of the Corner Point the Cycle is to be Performed at

The control determines the location of the radius or of the chamferaccording to the current tool quadrants and tool position.

R Choice of Alternatives: Radius or Chamfer

R+... = The cycle machines a radius with a radius R.R-... = The cycle machines a radius of length R.

Programming hints If the cycle G88 is programmed within a sequence of contour elements theindividual contour elements are being processed starting from the starting point ofthe full contour. If the contour element is located prior to the radiusing/the chamferparallel to X or Z axis it is not necessary to program it within the contour elementas its path is already defined by the corner point coordinates of the cycle G88.

Within contour programming radiusing or chamfers can also be programmedwith the following general commands:

G01 X... Z... R±... or G71 X... Z... R±...

and the following contour element can also be programmed with them. Theradiusing radius or the length of the chamfer is hereby given as the address R.

If the cycle G88 is programmed separately the starting position (=actual toolposition) is to be considered during cycle invocation: the control calculates the�direction� of the radius or chamfer based on the contour to be approached. Thecontour which is parallel to the axis and which is located closest to the actual toolposition is interpreted as the contour which is to be approached. The tool has to bepositioned in the approach area (see figures) prior to the invocation of the cycle.The location of the starting point for the various alternatives of separateprogramming of one radiusing or chamfer is being discussed in the following.

The travel movement of the tool takes place, as a rule, starting from the startingpoint (= current tool position when calling the cycle) to the starting point of theradiusing/chamfer (on the current contour to be gone to) to the end point ofradiusing/chamfer.

G88 Radius/Chamfer Cycle


Creating radius for

outer corner = starting point (current

tool position whencalling the cycle)

= programmed cornerpoint of the radius

= starting point of thecomplete contour

= end point of thecomplete contour

Programming

example

Creating radius for

outer corner

...N165 G42N170 G00 X+50 Z+5N175 G01 Z-30N180 G88 X+110 Z-30 R+10N185 G01 Z-80N190 G40...

The radius at the outer corner and the neighboring contour elements are machinedtogether.

Creating radius for

inner corner = starting point (current


= programmed cornerpoint of the radius



Programming

example

Creating radius for

inner corner

...N165 G42N170 G00 X+50 Z+5N175 G88 X+50 Z-35 R+10N180 G01 X+110N185 G40...

The radius at the inner corner and the neighboring contour elements are machinedtogether.

Radius/Chamfer Cycle G88

© MTS GmbH 1998 133

Creating chamfer

for outer corner = starting point (current


= programmed cornerpoint of the chamfer



Programming

example

Creating chamfer

for outer corner

...N165 G42N170 G00 X+50 Z+5N175 G01 Z-30N180 G88 X+110 Z-30 R-10N185 G01 Z-80N190 G40...

The chamfer at the outer corner and the neighboring contour elements aremachined together.

Position of the

starting point when

going separately to

the rounding at

outer corner


= programmed cornerpoint of the rounding

= starting point of therounding

= end point of therounding

= approach contourparallel to X axis

= approach area wherethe tool is to bepositioned when callingthe cycle

G88 Radius/Chamfer Cycle


Position of the

starting point when

going separately to

the rounding at

outer corner


= programmed cornerpoint of the rounding

= starting point of therounding


= approach contourparallel to Z axis


Position of the

starting point when

machining

separately a

chamfer at outer

corner


= programmed end pointof the chamfer

= starting point of thechamfer

= end point of thechamfer

= approach contourparallel to X axis


Position of the

starting point when

machining

separately a

chamfer at inner

corner


= programmed end pointof the chamfer

= starting point of thechamfer


= approach contourparallel to Z axis

= approach contourwhere the tool is to bepositioned when callingthe cycle

Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) G89

© MTS GmbH 1998 135

5.21 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour) G89

The cycles G65 (straight roughing cycle, conical contour) and G66 (plane roughingcycle, conical contour) in the version 5.x are replaced by a new cycle G89 in theversion 6.

Function Using G89 a straight or a plane roughing cycle with conical outer contour can beprogrammed. The generated tool geometry is a cylinder with a tapered sleeve. Thecycle can be used for machining the outer or inner surface.

NC Command G89 X... Z... S.../D... Y.../E.../(A... B...) O... [I...] [K...][H... W...] [R... V...] [L...]

Addresses of the

straight roughing

cycle G89 for

outside and inside

machining

Addresses X, Z Coordinates of the rectangle point

This rectangle point, as a corner located opposite to the starting point of thecycle (current tool position), describes a rectangle on whose sides all thecontour points of the conical contour are located .

FPlease, note:

When processing the cycle G89 the control interprets during programming

• in a straight roughing cycle the X coordinate of the starting point(=current tool position when calling the cycle) as a X coordinate of theend point of the conical sleeve,

• in a plane roughing cycle the Z coordinate of the starting point (currenttool position when calling the cycle) as the Z coordinate of the end pointof the conical sleeve

This requires that the tool is positioned at the desired X and Z coordinate ofthe end point of the conical sleeve prior to calling the cycle.

S Number of cuts to be made

If S is being programmed the control calculates the corresponding infeed.As an alternative to S, D can be programmed.

D Infeed (referring to the radius)

When processing the cycles the infeed can deviate from the programmed

value as it depends on the optional addresses R, V and L. As an

alternative to D, S can be programmed.

Y X or Z coordinate of the contour point the conical sleeve begins at

Alternatively, either E or A, B can be programmed.E Inclination angle of the conical sleeve against the negative Z axis

(straight roughing) or against the negative X axis (plane roughing)

When outside machining of the work part is being programmed E has to beprogrammed with a positive sign. For the inside machining of the work parta negative sign is used. Alternatively, either Y or A, B can be programmed.

G89 Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle (conical contour)


A, B Cone parameters

The inclination of the cone can also be programmed based on the relation ofthe lines A and B. Hereby A represents the line in direction X (referring tothe radius) and B the line in direction Z. Alternatively, Y and E can beprogrammed.

O Options: straight or plane roughing

O0 Straight roughing cycle (old: G65)O1 Plane roughing cycle (old: G66)

Optional

Addresses

I Finishing allowance in X (referring to radius)

K Finishing allowance in Z

H Chip breaking, infeed interruption in X and Z direction

H indicates the length of the line after which the infeed is interrupted tobreak the chip. H and W have to be programmed together.

W Chip breaking, return path of the tool in X or Z direction

W specifies the path the tool has to return after chip breaking. H and Whave to be programmed together.

R Decrease of infeed D per cut

When entering R both D and V need to have been programmed already.

V Minimum infeed D

When entering V, both D and R need to have been programmed already.

L Optimizing final machining cycle length

A non-fraction percentage value (1 <= L <= 100) is programmed as L for theinfeed D. The control then increases the infeed for the last roughing plane atmaximum by the per cent value stored under L, if the final machining cycledoes not need to be carried out in full length to complete the work part intoits final form.

Programming

hints

Unlike the axis-parallel straight or plane roughing cycles G75 and G76 which carryout machining at a straight angle against the cutting surface, the cycle G89 movesthe tool in a specified angle starting from a specified point to the end point of theprogrammed contour. In this way conical contours can be roughed

For the starting point of the cone the following programming options areavailable:

1. Enter the value for Y, at which the X or Z coordinates of the contour pointthe cone begin.

2. Enter the inclination angle E of the cone in relation to the negative Z axis(straight roughing) or in relation to the negative X axis (plane roughing).

3. Enter the relation of the lines A and B.

The cycle G89 is executed immediately after it has been programmed.

When processing the cycle G89 the control interprets during programming

• in a straight roughing cycle the X coordinate of the starting point (=currenttool position when calling the cycle) as the X coordinate of the cone end point,

• in a plane roughing cycle the Z coordinate of the starting point (=current toolposition when calling the cycle) as the Z coordinate of the cone end point.

This requires that the tool is positioned at the desired X and Z coordinate of theend point of the conical sleeve prior to calling the cycle.


© MTS GmbH 1998 137

Straight roughing

cycle (outside

machining)


= programmedrectangle point

= cone end point (the Xcoordinate of thispoint is derived fromthe X coordinate ofthe starting point)

= cone starting point

Programming

example

Straight roughing

cycle (outside

machining)

...N125 G00 X+102 Z+3N130 G89 X+45 Z-52.5 D+4 Y-32.5 O+0...

When machining outside surfaces the X coordinate of the starting point is the Xcoordinate of the cone end point as well. The inclination angle E is programmedwith a positive sign starting clockwise from the negative Z axis.

Straight roughing

cycle (inside

machining)



= cone end point (the Xcoordinate of thispoint is calculatedbased on the Xcoordinate of thestarting point )


Programming

example

Straight roughing

cycle (inside

machining)

...N100 G00 X+18 Z+3N105 G89 X+75 Z-52.5 S8 E-54 O+0...

When machining the inside of the work part the X coordinate of the starting pointhas to be smaller than or equal to the diameter of the premachined inside contour.The angle of inclination E is programmed with a negative sign startingcounterclockwise from the negative Z axis.



Plane roughing

cycle (outside

machining)

= starting point (currenttool location whencalling the cycle)


= cone end point (the Zcoordinate of thispoint is calculatedbased on the Zcoordinate of thestarting point)


Programming

example

Plane roughing

cycle (outside

machining)

...N180 G00 X+15 Z+3N185 G89 X+30 Z-50 D+6 Y-60 O+1...

The X coordinate of the starting point has to be larger than or equal to thediameter of the premachined work part outside contour. The angle of inclination Eis programmed with a positive sign starting counterclock-wise from the negative Xaxis.

Plane roughing

cycle (inside

machining)



= cone end point (the Zcoordinate of thispoint is calculatedbased on the Zcoordinate of thestarting point)


Programming

example

Plane roughing

cycle (inside

machining)

...N220 G00 X+102 Z+3N225 G89 X+100 Z-52.5 D+4 Y+62.5 O+1...

The X coordinate of the starting point has to be smaller than the diameter of thepremachined work part inside contour. The angle of inclination E is programmedwith a negative sign starting clockwise from the negative X axis.


© MTS GmbH 1998 139

Interrupting infeed

for chip breaking

a) for straight or

plane roughing

a) for plane

roughing

In case of chip breaking H specifies the string after which the infeed movement isinterrupted. W specifies the string the tool moves backwards before starting tomachine the string H again.

Degression of

cutting depth and

minimum infeed for

straight roughing

= remaining infeed(£ 2,5 mm)

Programming

example

Degression of

cutting depth and

minimum infeed for

straight roughing

Infeed D=4 mmDecrease R=0,5 mmMinimum infeed V=2,5 mm

In this example the programmed infeed D is reduced by the value R after eachmachining run. The value V specifies that the infeed is to be reduced at maximumup to 2,5 mm and remains valid for the remaining machining runs.



Degression of

cutting depth and

minimum infeed for

plane roughing

Programming

example

Degression of

cutting depth and

minimum infeed for

plane roughing

Infeed D=4 mmDecrease R=0,5 mmMinimum infeed V=2,5 mm

In this example the programmed infeed D is reduced by the value R after eachmachining run. The value V specifies that the infeed is to be reduced at maximumup to 2,5 mm and remains valid for the remaining machining runs.

Final roughing

optimizing for

straight roughing

= final optimizing levelfor roughing

Programming

example

Final roughing

optimizing for

straight roughing

Infeed D=4 mmFinal optimizing L=25%

In case of the programmed infeed D, for the last two cuts a roughing level of 5 mmin total remains.Normally, two additional machining runs would be needed to machine theremaining 5 mm. Using the final roughing optimizing the infeed is howeverincreased by 25 % up to 5 mm at maximum. Through this procedure onemachining run less is needed.


© MTS GmbH 1998 141

Final roughing

optimizing for plane

roughing

= final optimizing levelfor roughing

Programming

example

Final roughing

optimizing for plane

roughing

Infeed D=4 mmFinal roughing optimizing L=25%

In case of the programmed infeed D, for the last two cuts a roughing level of 5 mmin total remains.Normally, two additional machining runs would be needed to machine theremaining 5 mm. Using the final roughing optimizing the infeed is howeverincreased by 50 % up to 5 mm at maximum. Through this procedure onemachining run less is needed.

Segment Contour Programming


6 Segment Contour Programming

To meet the requirements of NC machining, the workpiece dimension specificationmust contain all coordinates necessary to comply with DIN 66025 for theprogramming of the end point of a straight line or a circular arc, or of the centre of acircle. In fact, workshop drawings of workpieces often lack som of the requireddimensions, and extensive mathematical calculations are often required toestablish the coordinates.

A contour string is defined as an oriented succession of entities (segments),namely straight lines and circular arcs, describing a contour of the workpiece. Inaddition to the starting and end points or centre points, angles, lengths, tangentialtransitions, roundings and chamfers, as are necessary for geometric definitionswithout auxiliary calculations, may also be entered. When segment contourprogramming is selected, transition points or end points of entities will be computedby the control system, with the effect that coordinates can be entered as specifiedin the workshop drawing.

6.1 G-Functions for Contour String Programming

G71 Linear Interpolation (analogous to G01)G72 Circular Interpolation: Clockwise (analogous to G02)G73 Circular Interpolation: Counterclockwise (analogous to G03)

FG71, G72 and G73 are non-modal commands, i.e. they take effect only in theblock in which they are programmed. Even if address values remain unchanged,they must be programmed once again in the subsequent NC block.

To structure the input of geometry, which will be necessary with a complex contourstring consisting of numerous entities, a so-called multi-point string (N-pointstring) is defined, namely as follows:

Definition An N-point string is defined as a sequence of N-1 entities with N points, from agiven starting point P0 to the end point PN-1, whose coordinates may either beentered or computed by the the control system from the data specified for the N-point string.

Specification of the dimensions of the last entity is required for the computing of theprevious entity and its end point coordinates. Starting out from the given point P0 aclosed N-point string can be computed. It follows that any contour can be computedas a sequence of linked N-point strings.

Common multi-point strings are the following:

- Two-Point Strings Consisting of one entity- Three-Point Strings Consisting of two entities- Four-Point Strings Consisting of three entities

G-Functions for Contour String Programming

© MTS GmbH 1998 143

Two-Point Strings (N=2)

Two-Point Strings define a single entity, either a straight line or a circular arc. Withthe starting point P0 given, the end point P1 will be computed according to thedimensions specified.

Diagram 6.1 : Two-Point Strings

Three-Point Strings (N=3)

Three-Point Strings comprise two entities. The following combinations are possible:

1. line - line2. line - arc3. arc - line4. arc - arc

Diagram 6.2 : Three-Point Strings

Additional Addresses


Addresses for Contour String Programming

Straight line G71

X/Z Target point coordinates in directions X and ZA Angle of the line to the positive X-axisL Length of the line

Diagram 6.3 : As a rule a line is defined by two of the above addresses. However the solution willnot neccessarily be uniquely defined.

Diagram 6.3.1 : Diagram 6.3.2 : Diagram 6.3.3 :

Example: The end coordinate Z and the length L of a line are given. A circle with the centreP0 and the radius L intersects the vertical line Z at the points P1 and P2(see Diagram 6.3.1). If the distance between the vertical line Z and P0 is exactly L,the vertical line touches the circle and there will be a single possible solution(see Diagram 6.3.2). If the distance between the vertical line Z and P0 is greaterthan L, there will be no solution (see Diagram 6.3.3). It follows that the number ofpossible solutions is two, one or none.

Circular arc G72 or G73

X/Z Target point coordinates in X and ZI/K Circle centre coordinates in X and Z

(incremental or absolute)A Arc starting angle to the positive Z-axisB Arc radiusE Arc end angle

Diagram 6.4 : Three of the above addresses must be specified to define a circular arc.Again the number of possible solutions as a rule will be two, one or none.

Tool Nose Compensation TNC

© MTS GmbH 1998 145

Programming Hints Programming of the X and Z coordinates is not mandatory. It follows that therespective values are not global, i.e. even identical values will have to beprogrammed once again to define the next entity in a contour string.

To compute a contour segment the control system will refer to the values specifiedin the NC block. If these specifications should prove insufficient, the conditions oftransition to the previous or to the next contour entity will be accounted for in thecomputing.

Example The chosen example is a three-point string, consisting of two lines.The following addresses have been defined:

1st. line X-Coordinate of the end point

2nd. line X- and Z-Coordinates of the end point plusthe angle A of the line to the positive Z axis

NC Block: G71 X...G71 X... Z... A...

Although the first line has not been defined, the system will compute the contourresulting from both lines:

Diagram 6.5 :- The starting point P0 of the contour string is defined by the current tool

position.- The end point of the first line P1 is situated on a parallel X1 to the Z - axis.- The end point P2 and the position of the second line are determined by the

angle A and the X and Z coordinates.

Diagram 6.6 :- The contour is uniquely defined, since the second line and the parallel line X1

intersect at point P1.

Diagram 6.5

⇒

Diagram 6.6

- If A=0 or A=180 : no solution!

- If X1=X2 : if A=0 or A=180: infinite number of solutions!

If A is unequal to 0 and unequal to 180: no solution!

Additional Addresses


6.2 Additional Addresses

In addition to the addresses for geometric dimensioning, as specified above, thesystem provides the addresses O and R for further simplification of contourprogramming.

The addresses O and R serve to select one of two alternative solutions. They alsoallow a chamfer or rounding to be inserted between to consecutive straight lines,without additional computing efforts. Tangential transitions to a line or to an arc canbe programmed to be automatically computed.

The following table lists the additional addresses available. More detailedexplanations are given in the subsequent sections.

Address Function

O070 Absolute coordinates of the centre of the circle

O000 Tangential transition to the previous segment

O001/O002 Selection of one of two possible solutions

R + Insertion of a rounding between two segments

O011/O012 Selection of one of two possible solutions with R+

R - Insertion of a chamfer between two linear segments

Circle Centres Absolute

© MTS GmbH 1998 147

6.2.1 Circle Centres Absolute

The coordinates of the center of an arc (defined by addresses I and K) may eitherbe programmed incremental to the starting point of the arc (P0) or relative to thezero point (absolute) (see Diagram 6.7). Conforming to general standards, thedefault configuration of the CNC Simulator is the incremental programming of thecentre of the circle.

If the coordinates of both centres are to be entered in the absolute system, theword O070 must be entered in that NC block which contains the programmedcoordinates of the circular arc.

With multi point strings the centre of an arc must be programmed using the

absolute system, since the starting point is normally not given, but must be

calculated by the control system. The execption to this rule is when the arc is

the first entry of a contour.

Arc centres incremental

NC Block: G72 X.. Z.. I.. K..

Arc centres absolute

NC Block: G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O070

Diagram 6.7

Programming Hints When O070 is programmed, both centre coordinates (I and K) must be entered asabsolute values.

O070 is not a self-retaining entry. It must be re-entered once again with each NCblock, even if these are consecutive.

If the circle centres (I and K) of the three-point and four-point strings representedbelow are entered in the absolute system, the input applies to the starting point P0of the N-point string.

If in the configuration the programming of circle centres has been set to theabsolute system, the programming of O070 will not be necessary.

Tangential Transitions


6.2.2 Tangential Transitions

It is quite common, especially with turning operations, for adjoining entities of aworkpiece contour not to intersect at two points but instead touch at exactly onecommon point. This is called a tangential transition between entities (see Diagram6.8).

Diagram 6.8

Such tangential transitions are possible between a straight line and a circular arc aswell as between two circular arcs.(see Diagram 6.9).

Diagram 6.9

Explanation When a starting point is given, two addresses are normally required to determine astraight line, three to determine a circular arc. However if the line or arc isconnected to the previous contour segment by a tangential transition, the number ofaddresses to be programmed can be reduced by one by a tangential transition. Thecontrol system will refer to the geometric definition of the tangential transition of twoentities to determine the next entity.


© MTS GmbH 1998 149

Example Next to a circular arc with the starting point P0 and the end point P1 (see Diagrams6.10 and 6.11) a straight line is to be programmed, of which only the end pointcoordinate Z is given. The starting point of that line is determined by the end pointP1 of the arc.

- If only the Z-coordinate of the line is given, the end point cannot bedetermined, because an infinite number of solutions exist (see Diagram 6.10)

- If however the line is connected tangentially to the arc, its direction is determinedby the tangent angle at point P1. The end point P2 of the line is defined by theintersection of the tangent with the given Z-coordinate(see Diagram 6.11).


Programming Hints A tangential transition between two contour entities is programmed by the

NC word O000. O000 must be entered in an NC block, together with the entity

tangentially connected to the preceding entity.

With all contour strings including a tangential transition the programming of

the starting angle A (rise of a line or tangent angle at the starting point P in

the direction of the circle orientation) may be replaced by the instruction

O000 for a tangential transition.



Pointed Tangential Transitions

When specific combinations of addresses are programmed for tangentialtransitions, a number of different mathematical solutions may result.

Example A straight line with a defined starting point P0 as well as a circular arc (G72) with adefined centre (I and K) and defined end point coordinates (X and Z) are given. Ifthere is a tangential transition of the straight line to the arc, two possible solutionsmay result from the computing (see. Diagram 6.12).

1st solution: the straight line is connected to the circle at the tangentialpoint P1-1, in the direction of the circle orientation(see Diagram 6.13).

2nd solution: the straight line is connected to the circle at the tangentialpoint P1-2, opposite to the direction of the circle orientation(see Diagram 6.14).

Diagram 6.12


FFFor reasons of clarification the contour resulting from the 2nd solution will bedenoted in the following as "pointed tangential transition".Version 5 of the Simulator provides the option of programming both solutions(cf.Section 6.1.3.4 Selection of Solutions - Tangential Transitions).Roundings may also be inserted between entities in the case of pointed tangentialtransitions (see Diagram 6.15).

Diagram 6.15

Selection of Solutions

© MTS GmbH 1998 151

6.2.3 Selection of Solutions

Depending on the addresses programmed, there may sometimes be two possiblemathematical solutions for the definition of a contour segment (see Diagram 6.16).Consequently, the control system must be told which contour to use. The followingcriteria serve to distinguish between the alternatives:

Angle Criterion:

- smaller or greater angle

Length Criteria:

- shorter or longer line (line criterion)

- smaller or greater arc (arc criterion)

The word O001 selects the first of the alternatives, O002 the second.

Priority of the Angle Criterion

FIf the two solutions have different angles as well as different lengths of line,

the angle criterion must be used in the selection.

Programmed addresses:

Z Z-Coordinate of the end point

I/K Centre coordinates

As only the Z-coordinate of the end point isgiven, both P1-1 and P1-2 are possible endpoints of the contour.

Diagram 6.16 : Example for application of the arc criterion

Programming Hints If no selection of alternatives (O001 or O002) is programmed, the control systemwill automatically select the first alternative (O001).

For clarity, it is recommended to specify O001 anyway, so as to indicate that thereare two possible solutions with a specific combination of addresses.



Selection of Solutions - Angle Criterion

In the following a three-point string, consisting of a line and an arc, serves as anexample of the application of angle criterion to select one of the alternativesolutions.

Given addresses:

L Length of the lineI,K Coordinates of the centre of the

arcX,Z Coordinates of the end of the arc

NC block

G71 L... O001 or O002

G72 X... Z... I... K... O070

Diagram 6.17 : Angle criterion for selection of a solution

Explanation - The end point of the line is situated on a circle with the radius L .- The position of the arc is determined by its centre (I and K, as absolute

coordinates) and by its (absolute) end point coordinates X and Z.

Under these conditions in the example given, the following solutions may result:

Solutions depending on the length L

No solution if the specified value L is either too small or too great, the endpoint of the line will not be situated on the arc => no solution;results of the computation and an appropriate error message willappear

Single solution if L equals the shortest distance between the circular arc and thestarting point P0, a tangential point is establisheda => singlesolution results

Two solutions the specified length L results in two intersection points P1-1 andP1-2 => two solutions

Selection by the Angle

Criterion

The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different angles to the positive Z-axis (angle criterion):

To select the first solution (smaller angle to the Z-axis) O001 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

To select the second solution (greater angle to the Z-axis) O002 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

Programming Hints To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in the same NC blocktogether as the applicable line.


© MTS GmbH 1998 153

Selection of Solutions - Line Criterion

A three-point string, comprising a line and an arc, serves as an example of theapplication of the line criterion in selecting a solution.

Given addresses:

A Angle of the line to the positive Z-axis

I,K Coordinates of the centre of thearc

X,Z Coordinates of the end of the arc

NC blockG71 A... O001 or O002G72 X... Z... I... K... O070

Diagram 6.18 : Line criterion for selection of a solution

Explanation - The end point of the line starting at P0 is situated on a half line at an angle Ato the positive Z-axis.

- The position of the arc is determined by its centre (I and K, as absolutecoordinates) and by its (absolute) end point coordinates X and Z.


Solution dependent on the angle A

No solution with the specified angle A neither a tangential point nor anintersection point will result => no solution - an appropriate errormessage will appear

Single solution with the specified angle A exactly one tangential point will result=> a single solution (tangent to the arc)

Two solutions with the specified angle A the half line will intersect the arc atboth the points P1-1 and P1-2 => two solutions

Selection by the

Line Criterion

The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different lengths of the line (line

criterion):

To select the first solution (shorter line) O001 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

To select the second solution (longer line) O002 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

Programming Hints To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in an NC block togetherwith the applicable line.



Selection of Solutions - Arc Criterion

A three-point string, comprising a line and an arc, serves as an example of theapplication of the arc criterion in selecting an alternative.

Given addresses:

I,K Coordinates of the centre of thearc

X,Z Coordinates of the end of the arcL Length of the line

NC block

G72 I... K... (O070) O001 or O002

G71 X... Z... L...

Diagram 6.19 : Selection of solutions by the arc criterion.

Explanation - Position and radius of the arc are defined by the centre coordinates I and Kand by the starting point P0.

- The end point of the contour is determined by the coordinates X and Z.- The starting point of the line is situated on a circle of the radius L.


Solution dependent on the length L

No solution if the value of L is either to small or to great, the starting point willnot be situated on the arc => no solution - an error message willappear

Single solution from the specified value L results exactly one tangential point

=> single solution

Two solutions from the specified value L result the two intersection points P1-1and P1-2 => two solutions

Selection by

the Arc Criterion

The alternative solutions are distinguished by the different lengths of the arc (arc

criterion):

To select the first solution (shorter arc) O001 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

To select the second solution (longer arc) O002 is programmedCourse of the contour:P -> P - -> P

Programming Hints To select a solution, O001 or O002 must be programmed in an NC block togetherwith the applicable line.


© MTS GmbH 1998 155

Selection of Solutions - Tangential Transitions

Tangent Criterion

Depending on the addresses programmed, different solutions of tangentialtransitions between contour segments may result.

Example A given line with a known starting point P0 is to be joined tangentially to a circulararc (G72) which is determined by its centre (I and K) and its end point coordinates(X and Z). Two mathematical solutions are possible with this example(see Diagram 6.20a).

1. the line joins the arc at the point P1-1 in the same direction as the circleorientation.

2. the line joins the arc at the point P1-2 in the direction opposite to the circleorientation (pointed tangential transition).

In previous versions of the Simulator only the first solution could be computed bythe control system (see Diagram 6.20b). Version 5 now permits the programming ofboth solutions in any given case.

Diagram 6.20a Diagram 6.20b Diagram 6.20c

To inform the control system of the desired course of the contour, address O001must be programmed to select the first solution (tangent in the direction of the circleorientation), or address O002 to select the second solution (tangent in the oppositedirection). The selected solution (either O001 or O002) must always beprogrammed in a NC block together with the first contour entity whose orientation isdetermined by that selection.Consequently the NC blocks of the example shown above (see Diagram 6.20c)would have to be programmed as follows:

1st solution O001: G71 O001

G72 X... Z... I... K... O000

2nd solution O002: G71 O002

G72 X... Z... I... K... O000

FWhen programming in the WOP mode (Workshop Oriented Programming), thefunction key <F5> serves to permit the programming of pointed tangents or not (cf.the WOP User Manual). If the option "pointed tangential transition" is deactivated,the control system automatically computes the contour solution O001. Separateprogramming of a solution will not be necessary.



Contrary to the "standard" tangential transitions, the "pointed" transitions can berounded (see Diagram 6.20d).

Programming Hints When programming in the WOP mode (Workshop-Oriented Programming), theoption "pointed tangential transitions" must be activated to program a roundingradius R+.

NC Block:

G71 R+.. O002 O011G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O000

Diagram 6.20d : Rounding of a pointed tangential transition

Rounding between Two Entities

© MTS GmbH 1998 157

6.3 Rounding between Two Entities

At the point of transition between two entities a rounding can be inserted, byprogramming the address R+. The value entered at R+ determines the radius of therounding.

Roundings can be inserted between any combination of contour entities, providedthat the entities intersect or touch at a tangential point. If two possible solutions forthe rounding arc have been computed (see Diagram 6.21), the arc criterion isapplied by specificying either O011 (smaller arc) or O012 (greater arc).

G71 A.. R+.. O011 or O012G71 X.. Z.. A..

Diagram 6.21 : Example of a rounding between two straight lines

Programming Hints If no selection of alternative solutions (O011 or O012) is programmed, the controlsystem will compute the execution of the smaller arc O011.

If two solutions for the positioning of the entities already exist, the insertion of arounding may result in four different solutions.

Example On the basis of the addresses programmed with a three-point string, consisting of aline and an arc, two mathematical solutions are possible (see Diagram 6.22 : P1-1and P1-2).

G71 X.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

Diagram 6.22 : Two solutions of a contour comprising a line and an arc.

Rounding between Two Entities


In the example shown above the angle criterion is used to determine the contour:O001 is programmed to select the line situated at the smaller angle to theZ-axis, O002 to select the line with the greater angle.

If additionally a rounding radius R+is programmed, each contour solution gives twopossible rounding radii with each contour solution. (see Diagram 6.23):

Analogous to employing the arc criterion, the desired rounding must beprogrammed in the NC block determining the contour, by entering eitherO011 (smaller arc) or O012 (greater arc).

Alternative roundings possible with the first contoursolution O001

G71 X.. O001 O011 or O012G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

Alternative roundings possible with the secondcontour solution O002

G71 X.. O002 O011 or O012G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

Diagram 6.23 : Selection of solutions from a total of four alternatives

If the specified rounding radius results in only one possible rounding arc with eachof the contour solutions, programming of O011 or O012 is not required(see Diagram 6.24).

G72 I.. K.. R+.. (O070) O011 or O012G72 X.. Z.. I.. K..

Diagram 6.24 : In this example the specified rounding radius results in only one solution foreach arc.

Chamfer between Two Lines

© MTS GmbH 1998 159

6.3.1 Chamfer between Two Lines

At the additional address R a symmetrical chamfer between two consecutive linescan be programmed. The contour will be computed by the control system accordingto the specified width of the chamfer (the value entered at R)(see Diagram 6.25).

NC Block:

G71 A.. R-..G71 X.. Z.. A..

Diagram 6.25

G71 Two-Point Strings : Straight Lines


6.4 Two-Point String: Straight Line G71

Any two of the addresses below can be used to program a straight line as a two-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known:

X X-coordinate of the end pointZ Z-coordinate of the end pointL Length of the lineA Angle of the line to the positive Z-axis

Optional addresses:

X/Z Coordinates of the end point ofthe line

L Length of the lineA Angle of the line to the positive

Z-axis

Diagram 6.2.1 : Diagram 6.2.1 : Two-Point String : Straight Line

Number of Solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution. When, for instance, the length or anaxially parallel angle has been entered, the result may be either two solutions or nosolution (cf. addresses for segment contour programming). If no solution is found, acorresponding error message will appear.

Programming Hints If two solutions result from the specified length L (cf. the table below), the desiredcontour must be determined by using the angle criterion (O001 for the smallerangle, O002 for the greater angle).

Two-Point String : Straight Line G71

© MTS GmbH 1998 161

Table of Available Two-Point Strings:

Straight Line Selction of Solutions

G71 X Z

G71 X L Angle Criterion

G71 X A

G71 Z L Angle Criterion

G71 Z A

G71 L A

Examples of Contour Strings with Alternative Solutions

G71 X.. L.. O001 or O002

The angle criterion determines the selection:

G71 Z.. L.. O001 or O002

O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).

G72/G73 Two-Point Strings: Circular Arcs


6.5 Two-Point String: Arc G72/G73

Any three of the below addresses can be used to program a circular arc as a two-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known:

X X-coordinate of the end pointZ Z-coordinate of the end pointI X-coordinate of the centre of the circleK Z-coordinate of the centre of the circleA Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the starting point P0B Arc radiusE Angle of the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation at the end point P1

Available Addresses:

X/Z Coordinates of the end point ofthe arc

I/K Coordinates of the centre of thearc

A Angle to the Z-axis of thetangent in the direction of thecircle orientation at the startingpoint P0

B Arc radiusE Angle to the positive Z-axis of

the tangent in the direction ofthe circle orientation at the endpoint P1

Diagram 6.3.1 : Two-Point String: Arc

Number of Solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). With some combinations of addresses may result in one, two, or nosolutions. Please see the below table for a listing of cases where two solutions mayoccur.

Programming Hints If the circle centre coordinates are programmed in the absolute system, theaddress O070 must be programmed in the same NC block.

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are of courseapplicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73) as well.

Two-Point String: Circular Arc G72/G73

© MTS GmbH 1998 163

Table of Available Two-Point Strings:

Arc Selection of Solutions

G72/73 X Z I

G72/73 X Y K

G72/73 X Z A

G72/73 X I K Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z I K Arc Criterion

G72/73 X I A Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z K A Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z I A Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z K A Arc Criterion

G72/73 X A B Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z A B Arc Criterion

G72/73 X Z B Arc Criterion

G72/73 X B E Arc Criterion

G72/73 Z B E Arc Criterion

G72/G73 Two-Point Strings: Circular Arcs


Examples of Two-Point Strings:

Circular Arc with Alternative Solutions

G72 X.. I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:

G72 Z.. I.. K..(O070) O001 or O002

O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 X.. I.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002


G72 X.. K.. A.. O001 or O002


G72 Z.. I.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002


G72 Z.. K.. A.. (O070) O001 or O002


Two-Point String: Circular Arc G72/G73

© MTS GmbH 1998 165

G72 X.. A.. B.. O001 or O002


G72 Z.. A.. B.. O001 or O002


G72 X.. Z.. B.. O001 or O002

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select the shorter arc,O002 is programmed to select the longer arc.

G72 X.. B.. E.. O001 or O002


G72 Z.. B.. E.. O001 or O002

O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select O1-2 (longer arc).

G71G71 Three-Point String: Line - Line


6.6 Three-Point String: Line - Line G71G71

Two consecutive straight lines can be programmed as a three-point string, providedthat the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string,the first line is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequentNC block, describing the second line. A total of four addresses must beprogrammed in the NC blocks.

Relevant addresses:

X1/Z1 Coordinates of the end point of thefirst line

L1 Length of the first lineA1 Angle of the first line to the

positive Z-axis

X2/Z2 Coordinates of the end point of thesecond line

L2 Length of the second lineA2 Angle of the second line to the

positive Z-axis

Diagram 6.4.1 : Three-point string comprising two straight lines

Number of Solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two solutions orno solution. Please see the below table for a listing of cases where theprogramming of certain combinations of address values may result in thecomputation of two solutions - such cases are denoted "Arc Criterion" in the column"Selection of Solutions", and explanatory diagrams are provided.

Programming Hints If two solutions result from the programmed address values, and if a selection(O001 or O002) is not programmed, the control system will assume the firstsolution O001.

FIf two addresses are programmed in the first NC block, the three-point string

is split into two two-point strings.

Three-Point String: Line - Line G71G71

© MTS GmbH 1998 167

Table of Available Three-Point Strings:

Line - Line Selection of Solutions

G71 XG71 X Z A

G71 XG71 Z L A

G71 ZG71 X Z A

G71 XG71 X Z L

Angle Criterion

G71 ZG71 X Z L

Angle Criterion

G71 ZG71 X L A

G71 LG71 X Z L

Angle Criterion

G71 LG71 X Z A

Angle Criterion

G71 LG71 X L A

Angle Criterion

G71 LG71 Z L A

Angle Criterion

G71 AG71 X Z L

Line Criterion

G71 AG71 X Z A

G71 AG71 X L A

G71 AG71 Z L A

G71 XG71 X Z L A

G71G71 Three-Point String: Line - Line


Examples of Three-Point Strings: G71G71 with AlternativeSolutions

G71 X.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. L..

The angle criterion is used to select of a solution:

G71 Z.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. L..


G71 L.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. L..


G71 L.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. A..


Three-Point String: Line - Line G71G71

© MTS GmbH 1998 169

G71 L.. O001 or O002G71 X.. L.. A..


G71 L.. O001 or O002G71 Z.. L.. A..


G71 A.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. L..

The line criterion is used to select of a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).

G72G71 or G73G71 Three-Point Strings: Arc - Line


6.7 Three-Point String: Arc - Line G72G71 or G73G71

A circular arc followed by a straight line can be programmed as a three-point string,provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string, the arc is not determined until its end point is programmed in thesubsequent NC block, describing the straight line.

Optional Addresses As a first contour entity a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be definedby its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listedbelow must be programmed:

I , K Centre coordinatesA , I Starting angle and centre coordinate in XA , K Starting angle and centre coordinate in ZA , B Starting angle and radius

For reasons of clarity, only the centre coordinates (I and K) of arcs are shown in thediagrams below.

Optional Addresses:

I/K Centre coordinates of the arcA1 Angle of the tangent in the

direction of the circle orientation atthe starting point P0

B Radius of the arc

X/Z Coordinates of the end point ofthe line

L Length of the lineA2 Angle of the line to the positive Z-

axisO000 Tangential transition between

segments

Diagram 6.5.1 : Three-point string consisting of a line and an arc

To determine a three-point string consisting of a line and an arc, a total of five ofthe above addresses must be programmed.

Number of solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two or nosolution.

Programming Hints In the case of contour strings with two possible solutions the arc criterion is used toselect the desired contour, by programming, in the first NC block, either O001

(smaller arc) or O002 (greater arc).

If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address O070 must beprogrammed in the same NC block.

Three-Point String: Arc - Line G72G71 or G73G71

© MTS GmbH 1998 171


Arc - Line Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G71 X Z A

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 X Z L

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 X L A

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 Z L A

Arc Criterion

Tangential Transition to the Line

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below, the word O000 must be programmed in thesecond NC block to define the tangential transition.When the WOP mode is operative, pointed tangential transitions may only beprogrammed if the appropriate option has been selected (function key <F5>).

Arc - Line Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G71 X Z O000

G72/G73 I K

G71 X A O000

Tangent Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 X L O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 Z A O000

Tangent Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 Z L O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 L A O000

Tangent Criterion

G72/G73 B

G71 X Z A O000

Arc Criterion

FNote: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by

the addresses A,I, A,K or A,B, instead of with the centre coordinates I,K. This

applies to all examples.



Examples of Three-Point Strings:

G72G71 with Alternative Solutions

FTo avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are howeveralso applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. A..


G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. L..


G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 X.. L.. A..


G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 Z.. L.. A..



© MTS GmbH 1998 173

Examples of a Tangential Transition

with Two Possible Solutions

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 X.. L.. O000

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G71 Z.. L.. O000

In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 B.. O001 or O002G71 X.. Z.. A.. O000

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).



Examples of Pointed Tangential Transitions

FPointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if thisoption has been selected with the function key <F5>.

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001G71 X.. A.. O000

G72 I.. K.. (O070) C+.. O002 O011G71 X.. A.. O000

The tangent criterion is used to select a solution:O001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in the direction of the circle orientation (P1-1) O002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001G71 Z.. A.. O000

G72 I.. K.. (O070) R+.. O002 O011G71 Z.. A.. O000



© MTS GmbH 1998 175

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001G71 L.. A.. O000 G72 I.. K.. (O070) R+.. O002 O011

G71 L.. A.. O000


G71G72 or G71G73 Three-Point String: Line - Arc


6.8 Three-Point String: Line - Arc G71G72 or G71G73

A straight line followed by a arc can be programmed as a three-point string,provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string, the line is not determined until its end point is programmed in thesubsequent NC block, describing the arc.

Optional Addresses:

X1/Z1 Coordinates of the end point of theline

L Length of the lineA Angle of the line to the positive Z-

axisX2/Z2 Coordinates of the end point of the

arcI/K Coordinates of the centre of the

arcB Radius of the arcE Angle to the positive Z-axis of the

oriented tangent at the end pointP2

O000 Tangential transition betweenentities

Diagram 6.6.1 : Three-point string consisting of line and arc

Number of solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single unequivocal solution (cf. addresses for segmentcontour programming). Some combinations of addresses may result in one, two,three, four or no solutions.

Programming Hints If several solutions are possible the desired contour must be determined byentering O001 or O002.

FTo determine a three-point string consisting of a line and an arc, a total of five ofthe above addresses must be programmed. Note: if more than one address is

programmed for the line, this will determine the line as a two-point string,

consequently the three-point string will be split up into two two-point strings.

If absolute coordinates are entered for the centre of the circle, the address O070must be programmed in the same NC block.

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are howeveralso applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).

Three-Point String: Line - Arc G71G72 or G71G73

© MTS GmbH 1998 177

Table of Available Three-Point Strings

without Tangential Transition:

Line - Arc Selestions of Solutions

G71 X

G72/G73 X Z I K

Angle Criterion

G71 Z

G72/G73 X Z I K

Angle Criterion

G71 X

G72/G73 X I K B

Angle CriterionArc Criterion

G71 X

G72/G73 Z I K B


G71 Z

G72/G73 X I K B


G71 Z

G72/G73 Z I K B


G71 L

G72/G73 X Z I K

Angle Criterion

G71 L

G72/G73 X I K B


G71 L

G72/G73 Z I K B


G71 A

G72/G73 X Z I K

Line Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 X I K B

Line CriterionArc Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 Z I K B

Line CriterionArc Criterion

Priority of the Angle Criterion

FIf the two solutions have different angles as well as different lengths of line,

the angle criterion must always be used in the selection.



With Tangential Transition between Segments

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below the word O000 is programmed in the secondNC block, to define the tangential transition.Pointed tangential transitions can only be programmed in the WOP mode if thisoption has been selected with the function key <F5>.

Line - Arc Selction of Solutions

G71 A

G72/G73 X Z B O000

Arc Criterion

G71

G72/G73 X Z I K O000

Tangent Criterion

G71

G72/G73 X I K B O000

Tangent CriterionArc Criterion

G71

G72/G73 Z I K B O000

Tangent CriterionArc Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 X B E O000

G71 A

G72/G73 Z B E O000


G71 X.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

G71 Z.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

In each case the angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).


© MTS GmbH 1998 179

G71 X.. O001 or O002G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

G71 X.. O001 or O002G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1(shorter arcs), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arcs).

G71 Z.. O001 or O002G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

G71 Z.. O001 or O002G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1(shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).

G71 L.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

The angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).



G71 L.. O001 or O002G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

G71 L.. O001 or O002G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P2-1(shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).

G71 A.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

The line criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).

G71 A.. O001 or O002G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

G71 A.. O001 or O002G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

In the first block G71 the angle criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line). In the second block G72 the arc criterion is used to select a solution: O001 is programmed to select P1-1(shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).


© MTS GmbH 1998 181

Examples of Tangential Transitions

G71 A.. O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. B.. O000

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).


FWhen the WOP mode is operative, pointed tangential transitions may only beprogrammed if the appropriate option has been selected with the function key<F5>.

G71 O001G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) O000

G71 R+.. O002 O011G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070) O000




G71 O001G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000

G71 R+.. O002 O011G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000


G71 O001G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000

G71 R+.. O002 O011G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O000


Three-Point String: Arc - Arc G72G72

© MTS GmbH 1998 183

6.9 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc G72G72 or G72G73 or G73G72 orG73G73

Two consecutive circular arcs can be programmed as a three-point string, providedthat the starting point P0 is known. According to the definition of a three-point string,the first arc is not determined until its end point is programmed in the subsequentNC block, describing the second arc.

Optional Addresses As a first contour entity a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can be definedby its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinations listedbelow must be programmed:

I, K Coordinates of the centre of the arcA, I Starting angle and centre coordinate in XA, K Starting angle and centre coordinate in ZA, B Starting angle and radius


Optional Addresses:

I1/K1 Centre coordinates of the first arcA Angle of the tangent in the

direction of the circle orientation atthe starting point P0

B1 Radius of the first arcI2/K2 Centre coordinates of the second

arcB2 Radius of the second arcX/Z End point coordinates of the

second arcE Angle to the positive Z-axis of the

oriented tangent at the end pointP2

O000 Tangential transition betweensegments

Number of solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). Some combinations of addresses may result in four, three, two, oneor no solutions.

Programming Hints When several solutions are possilbe the desired contour must be determined byentering O001 or O002.If absolute coordinates are entered for the centre of the circle, the address O070must be programmed in the same NC block.

G72G72 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc


To determine a three-point string consisting of two arcs, a total of six of the aboveaddresses must be programmed.


Arc - Arc Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 X Z I K

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 X I K B

Arc CriterionArc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 Z I K B

Arc CriterionArc Criterion

With Tangential Transitions between Contour Segments

Programming Hints With the contour strings listed below, the word O000 must be programmed in thesecond NC block to define the tangential transition.

Arc - Arc Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 X Z B O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 X B E O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 Z B E O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 A B

G72/G73 X B E O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 A B

G72/G73 Z B E O000

Arc Criterion

FFNote: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by

the addresses A I, A K or A B instead of with the centre coordinates I K. This



© MTS GmbH 1998 185


FFTo avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are howeveralso applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).As a model, all combinations of G72 and G73 possible with the first example

are shown in the diagrams below.

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G73 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

G73 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)

G73 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G73 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (O070)


G72G72 Three-Point String: Arc - Arc


G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. (O070) O001 or O002


2nd arc:O001 is programmed to select P2-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P2-2 (longer arc).

Examples of Tangential Transitions

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 X.. Z.. B.. O000

In each case the arc criterion is used to select asolution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).


© MTS GmbH 1998 187

G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002G72 X.. B.. E.. O000 G72 I.. K.. (O070) O001 or O002

G72 Z.. B.. E.. O000

In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to selected P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 A.. B.. O001 or O002G72 X.. B.. E.. O000 G72 A.. B.. O001 or O002

G72 Z.. B.. E.. B.. O000In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

Four-Point String


6.10 Four-Point String:with Tangential Transitions

Three contour segments (lines and arcs in any order) can be programmed as afour-point string, provided that the starting point P0 is known. According to thedefinition of a four-point string, the first and second entity are not determined untilthe third segment is defined.

Optional Addresses As a first segment of a contour, a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can bedefined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinationslisted below must be programmed:

I, K Centre coordinatesA, I Starting angle and centre coordinate in XA, K Starting angle and centre coordinate in ZA, B Starting angle and radius


Optional Addresses:

A Angle of the line to the positive Z-axis

B1 Radius of the first arcI/K Centre coordinates of the second

arcB2 Radius of the second arcZ Coordinate of the end point of the

second arcO000 Tangential transition between

segments

Diagram: Line - Arc - Arc

Number of solutions Depending on the programmed address values, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). Some combinations of addresses may not result in a single solutionbut in any number of sultions, from one to four.

Programming Hints If several solutions are possible the arc criterion must be used to determine thedesired contour, by entering O001 (smaller arc) or O002 (greater arc).

If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address O070 must beprogrammed in the same NC block.

With four-point strings the word O000 is programmed to define tangentialtransitions.

Four-Point String

© MTS GmbH 1998 189

Table of Available Four-Point Strings with TangentialTransitions:


G71 A

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 X Z I K O000

Arc Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 X I K B O000

Arc Criterion

Arc Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 Z I K B O000

Arc Criterion

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 X Z I K O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 X I K B O000

Arc Criterion

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 B O000

G72/G73 Z I K B O000

Arc Criterion

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 B O000

G71 X Z A O000

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 O000

G72/G73 X Z I K O000

Tangent Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 O000

G72/G73 X I K B O000

Tangent Criterion

Arc Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G71 O000

G72/G73 Z I K B O000

Tangent Criterion

Arc Criterion

FFNote: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by the

addresses A I, A K or A B instead of with the centre coordinates I K. This


To avoid repetition, as a rule only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in thegraphic representation of contour strings. All programming examples given arehowever also applicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73) and to any combination ofG72 and G73.

Examples of Contour Strings



and Tangential Transitions

G71 A.. O001 or O002G73 B.. O000G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. O000 (O070)

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to ¾elect P1-2 (longer arc).

G71 A.. O001 or O002G73 B.. O000G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. O000 (O070)

O001 or O002

G71 A.. O001 or O002G73 B.. O000G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. O000 (O070)

O001 or O002

In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution:1st arc:O001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).2nd arc:O001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc),O002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).


© MTS GmbH 1998 191

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. P000 (P070)

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:2nd arc:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

In each case the arc criterion is used to select a solution:2nd arcP001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

3rd arc:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G71 X.. Z.. A.. P000

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:2nd arc:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).




FFPointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if thisoption has been selected with the function key <F5>.If P002 (pointed tangential transition) is programmed in the first NC block, theselection of this solution will also apply to the second arc.

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001G71 P000G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (P070) P000

G72 I.. K.. (P070) R+.. P002 P011G71 R+.. P011 P000G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. (P070) P000

In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings.


© MTS GmbH 1998 193

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001G71 P000G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011G71 R+.. P011 P000G72 X.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings.

In the third NC block (2nd arc) the arc criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001G71 P000G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011G71 R+.. P011 P000G72 Z.. I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

P001 or P002

n the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1) P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 -

P2-2)with roundings.

In the third NC block (2nd arc) the arc criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P3-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P3-2 (longer arc).

Open Contour Strings


6.11 Open Contour Strings

To describe contour strings of any number of entities as multiple-point strings,would result in an unlimited number of arc and line combinations with acorresponding variety of address combinations. Since only a limited number ofexamples can be described in this manual, the exemplification of strings of fourpoints and longer has been confined to those with a tangential transition.

To describe a contour string longer than four points we use the terms "opencontour strings" and tangential connections.

Definition An "open contour string" denotes a multiple-point string with all of its segmentsgeometrically determined. Only the end point of the final entity remainsundetermined.Consequently, this final segment of an open contour string must be either a half lineor a full circle. The end point of this entity can only be determined by entering thenext entity; it is then computed by the control system. The next multiple-point stringis then linked-up, i.e. the last entity of the open contour string will be considered asthe first entity of the new multiple-point string.

Example - An open contour string with a tangential transition is given, consisting of anarc and a line. The end point of the line remains undetermined(see Diagram 6.9.1).

- Subsequent entities are an arc (G73) with given radius and an arc (G72) withend point and centre. Based on the known starting point of the line P1 afour-point string with tangential transitions is established, including the lineand both arcs (see Diagram 6.9.2).

G72 I.. K.. P070G71 A.. P000

⇒

G72 I.. K.. P070G71 A.. P000 P001G73 B.. P000G72 X.. Z.. I.. K.. P070 P000

Diagram 6.9.1 Diagram 6.9.2

In this example, the open contour string could also be continued by programming G72 I.. K.. B..


© MTS GmbH 1998 195

Optional Addresses:

X/Z Coordinates of the end point of theline

L Length of the lineA Angle of the line to the positive Z-

axisI/K Coordinates of the centre of the

arcB Radius of the arcP000 Tangential transition between

segments

Number of Solutions Depending on the address values programmed, the computation of the contourmay not always result in a single solution (cf. addresses for segment contourprogramming). Some combinations of addresses may result in four, three, two, oneor no solutions.

Optional Addresses As a first segment of a contour, a circular arc, starting at a known point P0 can bedefined by its centre and radius. One of the four alternative address combinationslisted below must be programmed:

I, K Centre coordinatesA, I Starting angle and centre coordinate in XA, K Starting angle and centre coordinate in ZA, B Starting angle and radius

For reasons of clarity, only the centre coordinates (I and K) of arcs will be shown inthe diagrams below.

Programming Hints When alternative solutions occur, the desired contour must be determined byentering P001 or P002.

If no particular solution is selected, the control system, will assume the first solutionP001.

If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address P070 must beprogrammed in the same NC block.

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are applicableto counter-clockwise arcs (G73) as well.



Table of Available Open Contour Strings:

One Entity Selection of Solutions

G71 A

G72/G73 I K

Two Entities Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G71 A P000

Tangent Criterion

G71 X

G72/G73 I K B

Angle Criterion

G71 Z

G72/G73 I K B

Angle Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 I K B

Line Criterion

G71 L

G72/G73 I K B

Angle Criterion

G71

G72/G73 I K B P000

Tangent Criterion

G72/G73 I K

G72/G73 I K B

Arc Criterion

Two Entities Selection of Solutions

G72/G73 I K

G71 P000

G72/G73 I K B P000

Tangent Criterion

G71 I K

G72/G73 B P000

G72/G73 I K B P000

Arc Criterion

G71 A

G72/G73 B P000

G72/G73 I K B P000

Arc Criterion

FFNote: a circular arc as a first contour segment may also be programmed by

the addresses A I, A K or A B, instead of by the centre coordinates I K. This



© MTS GmbH 1998 197


G71 X.. P001 or P002G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)

G71 Z.. P001 or P002G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)

The angle criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).

G71 A.. P001 or P002G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)

In the first block G71 :

The line criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter line),P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer line).

G71 L.. P001 or P002G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)

The angle criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (smaller angle),P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (greater angle).



G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070)

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc),P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

G71 A.. P001 or P002G73 B.. P000G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), .P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).


© MTS GmbH 1998 199


FFPointed tangential transitions may only be programmed in the WOP mode if thisoption has been selected with the function key <F5>.

G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001G71 A.. P000

G72 I.. K.. (P070) R+.. P002 P011G71 A.. P000

The tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding

G71 P001G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) P000

G71 R+.. P002 P011G72 I.. K.. B.. (P070) P000

The tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2)with a rounding



G72 I.. K.. (P070) P001G71 P000G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

G72 I.. K.. R+.. (P070) P002 P011G71 R+.. P011 P000G72 I.. K.. B.. P000 (P070)

In the first NC block (1st. arc) the tangent criterion is used to select a solution:P001 (left diagram) is programmed to select the tangent in direction of the circle orientation (P1-1 - P2-1). P002 (right diagram) is programmed to select the pointed tangential transition (P1-2 - P2-2)with roundings.

If P002 (pointed tangential transition) is programmed in the first NC block, this selection will also be applied to the second arc.

Tangential Connection

© MTS GmbH 1998 201

6.12 Tangential Connection

As a rule two addresses must be programmed to define a line, three addresses todefine an arc (see the description of two-point strings in Sections 6.2 and 6.3).However if a contour segment is connected to the previous segment by a tangentialtransition, one address will be sufficient to determine a line and two addresses todetermine an arc.

Cross Reference For more detailed instructions concerning tangential transitions between contoursegments, see Section 6.1.2 "Tangential Transitions".

Optional Addresses:

Line:

X/Z Coordinates of the end point of theline

L Length of the line

Arc:

X/Z Coordinates of the end point of thearc

I/K Coordinates of the centre of thearc

B Radius of the arc

To program a tangential transition between two contour segments, the addressP000 is entered in the second NC block. This address is equivalent to the startingangle A, which must not be programmed.

Programming Hints If absolute circle centre coordinates are entered, the address P070 must beprogrammed in the same NC block.

To avoid repetition, only clockwise-oriented arcs (G72) are included in the graphicrepresentation of contour strings. All programming examples given are alsoapplicable to counter-clockwise arcs (G73).



Examples of Contour Strings with Tangential Connection


G71 X P000

G71 Z P000

G71 L P000

G72/G73 X Z P000

G72/G73 X I P000 Arc Criterion

G72/G73 X K P000 Arc Criterion

G72/G73 Z I P000 Arc Criterion

G72/G73 Z K P000 Arc Criterion

G72/G73 X B P000 Arc Criterion

G72/G73 Z B P000 Arc Criterion


G72 X.. I.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002 G72 X.. K.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002

The arc criterion is used to select a solution:P001 is programmed to select P1-1 (shorter arc), P002 is programmed to select P1-2 (longer arc).


© MTS GmbH 1998 203

G72 Z.. I.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002 G72 Z.. K.. P000 (P070) P001 or P002


G72 X.. B.. P000 P001 or P002 G72 Z.. B.. P000 P001 or P002


Parameters


Assignment of Parameter Values:

N020 P01=-080.000

N025 P02=+015.000

N030 P03=+001.000

N035 P04=+040.000

N040 P05=-030.000

N045 P06=+006.000

N050 P07=+001.500

N055 P08=+070.000

N060 P09=+001.000

N065 P10=-070.000

N070 P11=+095.000

N075 P12=+001.500

N080 P13=+006.000

N085 P14=+000.920

N090 P15=+030.000

Diagram 7.1: Assignment of parameter values

Diagram 7.2: NC program, parameter programming

Parameters

© MTS GmbH 1998 205

7 Parameters

In the MTS Programming Code, parameters are generally programmed at theaddress P. A total of 100 registers "P00" to "P99" are available to the user.

Assignment of a Parameter Value

To assign a value to a parameter, the identification letter P and the number of theregister are entered. The assignation sign ("=" as a rule) will be set automatically bythe editor. The value which is to be assigned to this register must then be entered.

Example N120 P20= +100.000

The default parameter address and assignation sign may be edited in theconfiguration program (e.g. for use with other programming codes). Note: this kindof modification should be effected only if a format file containing has been created,the applicable parameter entries, or if the NC Editor is operating in the free formatmode.

In the free format mode an option is provided to assign a complete command (e.g.N20 P200= G0 X100) to a parameter register.The free format mode provides access to 32000 parameter registers.

FFThe assignement of a value to a parameter must be programmed either as aseparate NC block or at the end of a block.

Programming with Parameters

To program parameters within an NC block, enter, the identification letter, followedby the applicable parameter number after the address.

Example N475 P01 = +020.000 P02 = +030.000

òN485 G00 XP01 ZP02

In line with the value programmed in block N475 the tool will be moved in X to thevalue +20 and in Z to +30 when block 475 is executed.

If, in the free format mode, a command has been assigned to a parameter, thereis no need to program an address to invoke it.

Example N20 P200= G0 X100

òN140 P200

Rapid positioning of the tool at X +100.

Cross-Reference Please see the Operation Manual of the CNC Simulator for Turning for detailedinstructions concerning the configuration and operation of the free format mode.

Programming with Special Characters


Diagram 8.1: NC blocks N140, N150 and N235 contain comments.


© MTS GmbH 1998 207

8 Programming with Special Characters

8.1 Comments

To keep the structure of a generated NC program clear and intelligible,explanations and comments concerning specific NC blocks or program parts maybe included in the program itself. Comments must be flagged by special charactersto make them distinguishable from the program blocks. The flagged parts will beidentified by control system and skipped accordingly during program execution.

( The comment character "(" (opening parenthesis) can be used to explainspecific steps in the program run, such as G-commands and cycles.

Example N020 P01=-080.000 ( DRILLING DEPTH

...

N150 F000.200 S0450 T0404 M04 (LEFT HAND CORNER TOOL ALT/506

The comment character may be inserted directly after a command or on the nextline, depending on the length of the text to be entered.

Removing the comment sign will delete the whole line/comment.

8.2 Skipping of NC blocks

: The special character ":" (colon) serves to temporarily omit NC blocks, e.g. fortest purposes. The blocks indicated will be skipped in the program execution.

Example N210 G00 Z-017.000

N215 G00 X+046.000

N220 : G78 X+044.000 Z-025.000 I+002.000 K+005.000

N225 G78 X+044.000 Z-025.000 I+001.800 K+006.500

N230 G01 X+062.000 : Z-020.000

In this case the NC block N220 and the address Z-020.000 in block N230 will beskipped in the program execution.

Unlike the parenthesis sign preceding a comment, the colon can be removedwithout deleting the line: only the special character will disappear and the NC blockwill be re-integrated into the program run.



Diagram 8.2: Because of the arithmetic operations included in the NC blocks N270 andN300 these have been programmed in the "Temporary Free Format Mode".

Arithmetic Operations

© MTS GmbH 1998 209

8.3 Temporary Free Format

If the user wishes to dispense with syntax checking, automatic formatting etc., thefree format mode is the option to choose for NC Programming. In this programmingmode there are no limitations to entering characters and character strings. The freeformat mode can either be activated from the configuration program (to apply to anNC program in general), or by entering the character ")" (to apply to specificprogram lines). (See Ch. 7 of the CNC Simulator Operation Manual for a detaileddescription of the MTS Format and the Free Format Mode.)

) The character ")" (closing parentheses) activates the free format mode for theselected program line. As with the comment character (see above), anysequence of characters (including blanks) can be entered after the specialcharacter. All entries will take effect in the program run, while no syntaxchecking is applied. It is advisable to make sure that your entries are logicaland interpretable!

Example N270 ) G00 XP04+1 Z+001.000

FFThe option of activating the free format mode in each selected program line can beused for condensed input of NC blocks as well as to include arithmetic operationsin the programming:

8.4 Arithmetic Operations

In an NC program, a calculation may be specified as an arithmetic operation (e.g.XP1+1) or as a functional equation (e.g. P4=P1*P2). In both cases, the algebraicrules (e.g. 'priority of multiplication and division', 'priority of operations in brackets'),addition theoremes, rules of calculation with powers and logarithmic calculation etc.must be observed.The following operations can be programmed:

Addition + To effect an addition, the sign "+" (plus) must be programmed:

N270 ) G00 XP04+1 Z+001.000 (=> X = P04 + 1)

Subtraction - To effect a subtraction, the sign "-" (minus) must be programmed:

N445 ) P16 = P04 - P02

Multiplication * To effect a multiplication, the sign "*" (asterisk) must be programmed:

N320 ) G01 X P04 Z 2 * P03 (=> Z = 2 * P03)

Division / To effect a division, the sign "/" (slash) must be programmed:

N320 ) G01 X P04 Z 4 / P03 (=> Z = 4 / P03)



Statement of

Operational Signs

+ By specifying a + (plus) or - (minus) sign, an entered value can be- interpreted as a real number, with up to three places after the

decimal point. Values that have no sign will be interpreted as positivenumbers.:

N330 ) P1 = -005.500

N340 ) P2 = P1 + P1

òP2 = - 011.000

Brackets [] In addition to the operations described above, brackets can be used. Theapplicable characters are "[" (opening bracket) and "]" (closing bracket).

N260 ) G01 X [P1 + P2] * 2

Absolute Value ABS To enter a number as an absolute value, the character string "ABS" must beprogrammed prior to that number. This may serve to exclude negativevalues:

N330 ) P1 = -005.500

N350 ) P2 = ABS [+004.500 + P1]

òP2 = 001.000

Integer Value INT If, in the course of an arithmetic operation, only the numbers before thedecimal point should be taken into account, the character string "INT" mustbe programmed prior to the respective value:

N445 ) P1 = +010.000

N450 ) P2 = -001.500

N455 ) P1 = INT [P1 + P2]

...

N480 ) G23 P450 Q470 S3

òP1' = 008.000, P1'' = 006.000, P1''' = 004.000

During the first execution of the program part repetition P1 is set to the value 8, inthe second execution it is set to 6 and in the third to 4.

"Modulo" Value % "Modulo" is the term for the remainder of a division calculation, when theresult is to be a value of integer numbers e.g.:5 / 2 = 24

_____

1 (modulo-value)The division sign for modulo calculation is "%" (percentage) , e.g. 5 modulo 2: 5 %

2

N550 ) P1 = +010.000 % +003.000

òP1 = 001.000


© MTS GmbH 1998 211

Sine SIN The sine function applies to right-angled triangles and is established by thefunction "opposite cathetus/hypotenuse". The character string "SIN" must beprogrammed prior to entering a sine value in angular degrees.:

N400 ) P16 = SIN P15 * P03

Cosine COS The cosine function applies to right-angled triangles and is established by thefunction "adjacent cathetus/hypotenuse". The character string "COS" mustbe programmed prior to entering a cosine value in angular degrees.:

N405 ) P16 = COS [90 - P15] * P03

Tangent TAN The tangent function applies to right-angled triangles and is established bythe function "opposite cathetus/adjacent cathetus". The character string"TAN" must be programmed prior to entering a tangent value in angulardegrees:

N410 ) P17 = TAN P15 * P03

Arc Tangent ATANThe arc tangent function applies to right-angled triangles, it establishes theincluded angle of the adjacent cathetus and hypotenuse.This functional equation is the inverse function of the tangent: "oppositecathetus/adjacent cathetus". The character string "ATAN" must be entered toprogram the arc tangent, which will be calculated in angular degrees:

N420 ) P15 = ATAN P17 / P03

Square Root SQRTTo program the square root function, the character string "SQRT" is entered :

N320 ) P16 = SQRT +025.000

òP16 = 005.000

Exponential Function EXP This exponential function, programmed by the character string EXP, is basedon "Euler's constant" (e = 2,71828...); it serves to calculate the ex. value foreach case.

N820 ) P20 = EXP +003.000

Natural Logarithm LN As the inverse to the above exponential function, programming "LN" servesto calculate the logarithm to the base e :

N830 ) P21 = LN P20

FFNote: when applying arithmetical operations or programming parameters, theentered values or intended functions must "make sense" in the overall context ofthe NC programming. If the arithmetical operations prove invalid, a correspondingerror message with the suffix "operation error..." will appear (cf. CNC SimulatorOperating Manual).



Calculating a Chamfer:

Z2 => Z1 - P03

X2 => P04

Z1 = 000.000

X1 => P04 - 2 * P03 / TAN P15

Diagram 8.3: Applying a trigonometric function in the programming of a chamfer. If ageneral case is given, the Z1-value can also be parametricised.

Diagram 8.4: Programming with parameters and application of arithmetic operations.


© MTS GmbH 1998 213

8.5 Example of Programming with Parameters and ArithmeticOperations

In diagrams 7.2, 8.1 and 8.2, parameter programmed lines of NC programs arelisted, namely the deep drilling cyle (N140), the cross turning cycle (N165), theroughing cycle (N180 - N225), the roughing cycle in compliance with DIN 76 (N275)and the thread cutting cycle (N300). Each of these cutting cycles can easily bemodified by setting different parameters.With the roughing cycle a trigonometric function has been applied to describe thechamfer in a generalized form. This special type of programming is advisable in thegiven case, because the chamfer angle depends on the lead. In the following, ashort explanation is given of the arithmetic operations applied.Parameters relevant to the programming of the chamfer are the following:P03: Length of the chamferP04: Diameter at the chamfer end pointP15: Chamfer angle

The contour is described by determining two contour points:

1. First the cross turning is executed, up to the point where the chamfer is tobegin. The part diameter at this point can easily be calculated by applying thetangent function(see Diagr.):N190 ) G01 X [P04 - 2 * P03 / TANP15]

Note: dx = X2 - X1 relates to the diameter. The value of the adjacent cathetus inthe tangent function must therefore be doubled.

2. As a next step the end point of the chamfer must be defined:N195 ) G01 XP04 Z-P03

Note: this contour description is based on Z1 = 000.000. If the user wishes todefine a generally valid function, Z1 can be programmed as a parameter.

FFParametricized cutting cycles can be used as macros for other NC programs.

Note: If you choose to use macros as subprograms, make sure you do notprogram any jump instructions or program part repetitions.

Setup Form


Diagram 9.1 : Setup form; programming of data for the automatic setup of the machine tool.

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 215

9 Setup Form

9.1 Preface

The setup form lists all data necessary for the automatic setup of a machine toolwhen an NC program is started, as defined in the Simulator configuration. This dataincludes the following:

- Blank-/part geometry- Clamping devices and clamping mode- Tools in the turret and current tool- Offset values of the tools employed

Setup forms describing the status of the machine at any time can be createdautomatically or manually. Each setup form is listed before the NC program towhich it applies and is distinctly separated from the actual program lines. It is alsopossible to create and manage an NC program bound to a specific set of setupdata.

If the setup form interpreter (see CNC Simulator Operating Manual) is selected,the CNC Simulator will automatically be set up according to the specified setupdata, each time the respective NC program is loaded in the automatic or in theinteractive programming mode.

If the user wishes to include the setup of a specific machine status in the start-uproutine of the CNC Simulator itself, the name of the NC program to which that setupapplies, must be specified in the configuration program. In cases where a setupform and a status file have been specified in the configuration, the Simulator will beset up according to the status file.

The setup form function considerably speeds up programming, because specificNC programs can be repeatedly edited without the need to re-program theSimulator setup for each work session. At the same time the setup form serves todocument the machine status, which can then be verified and edited at any time. Asan additional data backup, we recommend that the user make printed copies of theNC programs generated.

Note Note: When a setup form documenting a specific machine status is generatedautomatically, it will be included in the current NC program without a securityprompt. If the selected NC program already has a setup form prefixed to it, this willbe overwritten without further dialogue.

FFWhen manually creating or editing a setup form, it is important to check on

the valid input of words, parameters and values. Invalid keywords will be

ignored and missing parameters will be set to zero. Trouble-free execution of

a program is guaranteed only if there are no errors with value input and

spelling.

If specific data is missing or wronly entered, as a rule the respective data

from the previous definition of the machine status will normally be entered.

Setup Form


()(( 26.6.1998 08:20(( CONFIGURATION( MACHINE MTS TC-DRT-CSP-042-0400x2000( CONTROL MTS TC DRT CSP CONTROL(( PART( CYLINDER D060.000 L112.000( MATERIAL C 45 W-Nr: 1.0503( DENSITY 007.90(( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART( CHUCK KFD-HS 130( STEP JAW HM-110_130-02.001( TYPE OF CHUCK EXTERNAL CHUCK OUTSIDE STEP JAW( CHUCKING DEPTH E18.000(( Right side of the part: Z+222.000(( COUNTER SPINDLE WITHOUT WORKPART( CHUCK KFD-HS 160( STEP JAW HM-160_200-01.001( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+1000.000(( CURRENT TOOL T01( TOOLS( T01 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SCLCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30( T02 CENTER DRILL CD-04.00/056/R/HSS ISO30( T03 TWIST DRILL DR-10.00/087/R/HSS ISO30( T04 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30( T05 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SVJCL-2020/L/1604 ISO30( T06 RECESSING TOOL ER-SGTFL-2012/L/02.4-0 ISO30( T07 LEFT THREADING TOOL TL-LHTR-2020/R/60/3.00 ISO30( T08-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SCLCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30( T09-R REVERSIBLE TIP DRL DI-26.00/059/R/HMT ISO30( T10-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNL-2020/L/1604 ISO30( T11-R LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNL-2020/L/1604 ISO30( T12-R INSIDE TURNING TOOL POST BI-SDQCL-1212/L/0704 ISO30( T13-R INTERN. THREADING TOOL POSTAX. TI-ITTR-2016/R/60/2.50 ISO30( T14 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SVJCL-2020/L/1604 ISO30( T15-R TWIST DRILL DR-14.00/065/R/HSS ISO30( T16 LEFT THREADING TOOL TL-LHTR-2020/R/60/3.00 ISO30(( TOOL COMPENSATION( D01 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E005.000 I-000.400 K-000.400( D02 R000.000 X+062.000 Z+070.000 G004.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000( D03 R000.000 X+062.000 Z+129.000 G010.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000( D04 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E032.000 I-000.400 K-000.400( D05 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E052.000 I-000.400 K-000.400( D06 R000.160 X+095.000 Z+038.700 G002.400 E000.000 I-000.160 K-000.160( D07 R000.433 X+105.000 Z+037.067 G000.000 E000.000 I-000.433 K+000.000( D08 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E005.000 I-000.400 K+000.400( D09 R000.000 X+065.000 Z-115.000 G026.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000( D10 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E027.000 I-000.400 K+000.400( D11 R000.400 X+100.000 Z-041.500 G000.000 E027.000 I-000.400 K+000.400( D12 R000.400 X+056.224 Z-120.000 G000.000 E017.500 I+000.400 K+000.400( D13 R000.361 X+051.439 Z-120.000 G000.000 E000.000 I+000.361 K+000.000( D14 R000.400 X+100.000 Z+041.500 G000.000 E052.000 I-000.400 K-000.400( D15 R000.000 X+062.000 Z-112.000 G014.000 E000.000 I+000.000 K+000.000( D16 R000.433 X+105.000 Z+037.067 G000.000 E000.000 I-000.433 K+000.000(()

Diagram 9.2 : Setup data of an NC program

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 217

9.2 Syntax of the Setup Form

As with the generation of an NC program, the setup data is programmed using theNC- editor or the interactive programming mode. By an appropriate default entry inthe Simulator control configuration, the setup form data can be protected againstmanual editing. This may be recommendable e.g. for training purposes.If manual entry or editing of setup form data is desired, certain conventionsconcerning the programming language ("syntax rules") must be observed to ensurecorrect interpretation. The diagram on the previous page shows an example: thesetup form of an NC program.

Beginning and End

Indicator:

The beginning and end of the setup form must be indicated by the character string"()" Deleting one of these indicators may lead to problems in the program run.

Line Start Indicator The character "(" - otherwise used to denote a comment - must be entered at thebeginning of each new line.

Break Character Different entries within the same line must be separated by at least one blank

character.

Keywords A number of pre-defined "keywords" can be used with the entry of setup data,serving to denote that element of the machining space to which the subsequentinformation relates. These keywords are given and explained in further detail on thefollowing pages.

e.g.: ( CYLINDER D60 L112The character"(" indicates the beginning of a new line and the characterstring "CYLINDER" is the keyword for the definition of a blank.

Parameters After the keyword has been entered, the appropriate elements can be specifiedeither by input of dimensions or by entering object or file names.

e.g.: ( T04 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30The corner tool identified by " CL-SDJCL-2020/L/1204 ISO30" is mounted tothe turret position "T04" .

Groups of Elements For the sake of clarity, all entries relating to a common technical context will bearranged in "groups". The grouping has a binding effect and must therefore beobserved in the subsequent programming. :

e.g.: (MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART( CHUCK KFD-HS 130( STEP JAW HM-110_130-02.001( TYPE OF CHUCK EXTERNAL CHUCK OUTSIDE STEP JAW( CHUCKING DEPTH E18.000

Comments To include comments in the setup form, another opening parenthesis "("must beentered to indicate the beginning of the comment text. Specific comments - e.g."right face of the workpiece : ..." - will be set automatically when a setup form isrepresenting a current machine status is created.In cases where the character "(" is also used to name an element, the charactershould be entered twice to make sure it will not be interpreted as a commentcharacter.Example.: Chuck Name : "SP5(120" -> Setup form: ( LATHE CHUCK SP5((120

Setup Form


9.3 Setup Data: Beginning/End Indicator

Function The beginning and end of the setup form is indicated by the character string "()"(opening/closing parenthesis)

NC Block ()...()

Note The character strings indicating the beginning and end of the setup form must beprogrammed to ensure trouble-free program execution.

9.4 Setup Data: Configuration Files

Function For the sake of clarity the activated machine and control configuration files can bespecified in the setup form. This will facilitate the selection of the appropriateconfiguration with later test runs of the NC program.

NC Block ( CONFIGURATION( MACHINE [FILENAME1]( CONTROL [FILENAME2]

Addresses [FILENAME1] Name of the machine configuration file

[FILENAME2] Name of the control configuration file

Note Configuration files cannot be read-in while the CNC Simulator is switched on; it istherefore of no importance for the program run, whether such files have beenspecified in the setup form. To edit the configuration, machining must be interruptedand the desired configuration files identified in the selection menu.

Example ( CONFIGURATION

( MACHINE MTS TC-DRT-CSP-042-0400x2000

( CONTROL MTS TC DRT CSP CONTROL

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 219

9.5 Setup Data: Blank

Function Blanks can be cylindrical core pieces (cylinder, cylinder with chamfer) or tubes(tube, tube with chamfer). Furthermore it is possible to overlap each rotationsymmetrical raw part geometry additionally with a polygon as an outside contour.

The polygon is specified with the number N for corners and with the width over theflats D. Based on these data and on the quantity theory the raw part is created asan average of the cylinder/tube with the N-polygon.

NC Block ( CYLINDER D... L...

( CYLINDER WITH CENTRE HOLE D... L... WS... WF... DS... DF...

( TUBE D... L... I...

( CHAMFERED TUBE D... L... I... WS... WF... DS... DF...

( N-POLYGON N006 D050.000

Addresses D Diameter of cylinder or tube respectivelythe width of each side of the N- polygon

L Length of cylinder or tube

I Internal diameter of tube

WS Angle of chamfer at face end

WF Angle of chamfer at chucked end

DS Diameter of chamfer at face end

DF Diameter of chamfer at chucked end

N Number of corners of the N-polygon

Programming Example: ( CHAMFERED TUBE D+170.000 L+170.000 I+080.000 WS+090.000WF+090.000 DS+100.000 DF+100.000

Setting up work part :

chamfered tube

Note The values entered must only relate to one type of blank at a time.Parameters not entered will automatically be set to zero.

Setup Form


Programming Example: ( N-KANT N006 D050.000

N-polygon Clarification: N = number of corners D = width of each side

• If N is an even number then: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of two

opposite areas.

• If N is an uneven number then: the width of each polygon side D corresponds to the distance of one side

to the opposite area.

Setting up work part:

N-polygon

3D view:

demonstration of the

N-sided polygon

specified as a blank

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 221

9.6 Setup Data: Prefabricated Part

Function Instead of a blank, a prefabricated part may be inserted. This can be specified inthe setup form either by entering the keyword "Blank Geometry" and subsequentlydescribing an NC program in compliance with DIN 66025 including theG-commands "G00", G01", "G02" or "G03" (all specified in the setup form), or - ifthere is already a workpiece file - by entering the keyword "Blank Filename" andsubsequently specifying the file name.

NC Block ( BLANK GEOMETRY [NC program]( BLANK FILENAME [FILENAME.DWS]

Addresses [NC program] After the keyword the geometry is described as an NCprogram in compliance with DIN 66025 (closed contour,1st block: Feed adjustm. at "G00" or "G01").

[Filename.DWS] Name of the workpiece file

Programming Example: ( BLANK GEOMETRY X+000.000Z+270.000( G01 X+120.000 Z+270.000( G01 X+130.000 Z+260.000( G01 X+130.000 Z+170.000( G02 X+170.000 Z+155.000 I+000.000 K+015.000( G01 X+170.000 Z+60.000( G01 X+000.000 Z+060.000( G01 X+000.000 Z+270.000( M30

Setting up work part :

prefabricated part

Setup Data: Workpiece Material

Function After the keyword "material" the desired type of workpiece material can be entered.In addition to the information on the raw material of the work part to be machinedalso the material density can be entered. This value corresponds to the specificmaterial weight and is internally used in the NC program analysis for the calculationof the milled mass.

NC Block ( MATERIAL[type of the selected material]( DENSITY [density of the selected material]

Example ( MATERIAL C 45 W-Nr: 1.0503( DENSITY 007.90

Setup Form


9.7 Setup Data: Clamping Devices

Function The clamping device management of the Simulator for Turning provides the meansto define and manage lathe chucks, step jaws, lathe centres, face drivers, colletsand sleeves. To select of one of the available elements, the desired (and, ofcourse, matching) elements must be entered under the group name "clampingdevices":

NC Block ( CLAMPING DEVICES( LATHE CHUCK [Chuck]( STEP JAW [Set of jaws]( SLEEVE TIP [Sleeve tip]( FACE DRIVER [Face driver]( COLLET CHUCK [Collet chuck)( COLLET [Collet]

Addresses [Chuck] Name of the lathe chuck

[Set of jaws] ame of the step jaws

[Sleeve tip] Name of the sleeve tip

[Face driver] Name of the face driver

[Collet chuck] Name of the collet chuck

[Collet] Name of the collet

Note Only matching clamping elements can be specified. See clamping devicemanagement for the correct names of the clamping elements.

Setting-up:

Clamping selection

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 223

Clamping on counter

spindle

If the turning machine is configured for counter spindle it is possible to select acorresponding clamping device and to use the counter spindle.

Setting-up:

Clamping on the main

and counter spindle

9.8 Setup Data: Clamping Mode

Function The clamping mode (the way the step jaws are used to chuck the workpiece) isentered under the group name "Clamping Mode".

NC Block ( CLAMPING MODE EXT. CLAMPING EXT. STEPPED JAWS( CLAMPING MODE EXT. CLAMPING INT. STEPPED JAWS( CLAMPING MODE INT. CLAMPING EXT. STEPPED JAWS( CLAMPING MODE INT. CLAMPING INT. STEPPED JAWS

Addresses "External clamping" or "internal clamping" denotes the selected type of clamping."External stepped jaws" or "internal stepped jaws" defines the way of applying thestepped jaws.Keywords have no parameters.

Note The clamping mode must be consistent with the blank/workpiece geometry.If no clamping mode is defined, the default mode will be external clamping withexternally stepped jaws.If a clamping mode has been defined and "turning between centres" has beenselected as the clamping device, the entry concerning the clamping mode will beignored.

Setup Form


9.9 Setup Data: Tailstock/Sleeve

Function Additionally a tailstock can be defined, on condition that this option has beenprovided for in the CNC Simulator Configuration.

NC Block ( TAILSTOCK POSITION Z...

Addresses Z After the keyword "tailstock" the position of the tailstock in Z must be entered.

Note Check on possible collisions. The turret will be moved to the reference point in theautomatic setup procedure.

9.10 Setup Data: Chucking Depth

Function The final parameter for definition of the clamping is the chucking depth.

NC Block ( CHUCKING DEPTH E...

Addresses E Chucking depth in Z


...( CHUCKING DEPTH E+028.000...

Note To facilitate the programming of the workpiece zero, the Z-value of the front facewill be indicated as a comment when a setup form is generated automatically.

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 225

9.11 Setup Data: Counter Spindle

With the additional option to install a counter spindle on a CNC machine tool it wasnecessary to extend the set-up sheet information.

2 work parts In the set-up sheet it is possible to store information on two work parts. Also theinformation which of the work parts is chucked on each spindle is stored in the set-up sheet.

Example 1 Set-up sheet of a turning machine with counter spindle and two work parts.

definition of thefirst work part

defintition of thesecond work part

clamping the first workpart in the main spindle

clamping the secondwork part in the counter

spindle

...( PART 1( CYLINDER D020.000 L072.400( MATERIAL C 45 W.-No 1.0503(( PART 2( GEOMETRY X+000.000 Z+435.200( G01 X+020.000 Z+435.200( G01 X+020.000 Z+441.588( G03 X+019.700 Z+441.900 I+000.250 K+000.312...( G01 X+000.000 Z+435.200( M30( MATERIAL C 45 W.-No 1.0503(( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART 1( COLLET CHUCK BO-HS( COLLET BO-BC32-20( CHUCKING DEPTH E54.700(( Right side of the part: Z+017.700(( COUNTER SPINDLE WITH WORKPART 2( COLLET CHUCK BO-GS( COLLET BO-BC32-14( CHUCKING DEPTH E9.500( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+423.000(( Left workpart surface: Z+416.200...

Example 2 Set-up sheet of a turning machine with counter spindle and one work part.

definition of the work part

clamping the work partin the main spindle

no work part in thecounter spindle

...( PART( CYLINDER D025.000 L162.400

( MATERIAL ::Messing( DENSITY 008.70(( MAIN SPINDLE WITH WORKPART( COLLET CHUCK CCPO-KSPF-48( COLLET POCC-171E-22( CHUCKING DEPTH E81.000(( Right side of the part: Z+172.000(( COUNTER SPINDLE WITHOUT WORKPART( COLLET CHUCK CCPO-KSPF-48( COLLET POCC-171E-22( POS. COUNTER SPINDLE Z+1000.000...

Setup Form


9.12 Setup Data: Current Tool

Function This entry serves to program a selected tool in the turret to be moved to theworking position. Prior to this the turret is positioned at the reference point.

NC Block ( CURRENT TOOL T..

Addresses T Specification of the selected tool in the turret (two-digit, e.g. "T09")

Note It is essential to make sure that moving the selected tool to the working position willnot cause a collision.

9.13 Setup Data: Tools in the Turret

Function The selection of tools to be mounted in the turret is determined by entering, underthe group name "Tools", the two-digit position numbers, the keywords of tool typesand the tool names.

NC Block ( TOOLS

( T.. RIGHT CORNER TOOL [Tool name]( T.. LEFT CORNER TOOL [Tool name]( T.. COPYING TOOL [Tool name]( T.. ROUND HORIZONTAL [Tool name]( T.. INSIDE TURNING TOOL POST [Tool name]( T.. INSIDE TURNING TOOL PRE [Tool name]( T.. INSIDE RECESSING TOOL PREAXI. [Tool name]( T.. INSIDE RECESSING TOOL POSTAXI. [Tool name]( T.. FRONT GROOVING TOOL [Tool name]( T.. RECESSING TOOL [Tool name]( T.. RH THREADING TOOL [Tool name]( T.. LEFT THREADING TOOL [Tool name]( T.. TWIST DRILL [Tool name]( T.. CENTER DRILL [Tool name]]( T.. REVERSIBLE TIP DRL [Tool name]( T.. INTERN THREADING TOOL PREAXI. [Tool name]( T.. INTERN THREADING TOOL POSTAX. [Tool name( T.. SPECIAL TOOL. [Tool name]( T.. EMPTY

Addresses T Specification of the selected tool in the turret (two-digit, e.g. "T09")

The appropriate "tool name" can be found under "tool management"..

Note Only tools that are included in the tool management can be specified. If a tool typekeyword has been spelled incorrectly no new tools can be mounted. If the toolname is invalid, a corresponding error message will appear.

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 227

9.14 Setup Data: Driven Tools

Driven tools for

horizontal and

vertical milling

operations

If a turning machine has been configured for driven tools the turret and the toolmanagement function are correspondingly extended to allow horizontal andvertical milling tools.

When using driven tools it is possible to select milling tools out of the followingmachining groups:

• End mill• Slot milling tool• T-slot cutter• Radius cutter• Reamer• Tap• Drill• Core drill

The individual tools of the above groups can be used either vertically or horizontallyin the turret. This definition is made in set-up mode under the menu item forequipping the turret.

CNC simulator turning version 6 offers new tool adaptation possibilities for turningand for driven tools especially for the use of the counter spindle.In case of this type of turret the tool carrier reference points are located on theturret surface. For tool equipping special tool adapters are available.

If the turning machine is configured for counter spindle the user can define the useof the tools for machining on the main or counter spindle, after the turret has beenequipped. This definition is done with the menu item �Turn the tool� in the mainmenu of equipping the turret. Herewith the current tool is turned 180° and used inthe turret.

Setting-up:

Equipping the turret

with driven tools

Setup Form


Additional

identification of

tool application in

set-up sheet

Next to the information on turret position equipping the set-up sheet containsadditional identifications on the application of the tool. These identifications eachhave a different meaning:

-R This letter indicates that a turning tool or a horizontal milling tool is installedin the tool turret, turned 180°, for machining on counter spindle.

-V This letter indicates that a milling tool is used for vertical machiningirrespective of the fact if machining takes place on the main or counterspindle.

Based on the additional identifications for the tool application the following set-upsheet alternatives are possible:

Example 1

( T06 SLOT MILLING TOOL MS-10.0/022K/HSS ISO 1641

Clarification: Milling tool without identification = horizontal clamping formachining on the main spindle

Example 2

( T08-R SLOT MILLING TOOL MS-14.0/053L/HSS ISO 1641

Clarification: Milling tool with identification R = horizontal clamping formachining on the counter spindle

Example 3

( T07-V RADIUS CUTTER RC-03/01.5/05/HSS ISO1641

Clarification: Milling tool with identification V = vertical clamping for machiningon the main and counter spindle

Example 4

( T02 LEFT CORNER TOOL CL-MTJNR-2020/R/1604 ISO30

Clarification: Turning tool without identification = machining on the main spindle

Example 5

( T04-R RIGHT CORNER TOOL CR- MSBNL-2020/R/1204 ISO30

Clarification: Turning tool with identification R = machining on the counterspindle

Setup Form

© MTS GmbH 1998 229

Compensation values for Left Corner Tool and Axial Reccessing Tool:

Setup Form, Compensation Values for Tools in the Turret:

Setup Form


9.15 Setup Data: Compensation Values

Function The compensation values of the active tools may be automatically read in from thetool management or the offset value registers may be "manually" defined by theuser, by entering the keyword "compensation values" followed by the compensationvalues.

NC Block ( VALID COMPENSATION VALUES

( COMPENSATION VALUES

( D.. R... X... Z... G... E... I... K...

Addresses The keyword "Valid Compensation Values" is entered without parameters. Thiseffects the setting of the default compensation values to the appropriate registers,denoted by numbers corresponding to the turret position numbers, e.g. the offsetvalues for "T01" are stored in the register "01" etc.

Denotation Parameter

Number of register D (Two-digit:01-16)

Tool nose radius R

Drills: R=000.000

Coordinates of the theoretical tool tip

relative to the tool reference point

X and Z

Max. width of recessing tool

or diameter of drill

G

All other tools:

G=000.000

Plan angle of external and

internal tools

E

All other tools: E=000.000

Tool nose compensation vector 1 I and K

Drills: =000.000

Note For a detailed description of the definition of compensation values, see theOperating Manual of the CNC Simulator.

NC Program Analysis

© MTS GmbH 1998 231

10 NC Program Analysis

The NC program analysis is a comfortable tool for the technological andeconomical analysis of rotation symmetrical machining within NC programs.

For each tool applied in the simulation it calculates the corresponding machining ofthe work part in form of a travel path representation including a table with thecorresponding technological data.

With reference to each tool and to the corresponding machining the followinginformation is calculated for each machining process:

• machining process (commentary in NC program)• tool position in turret• minimum and maximum infeed of cutting point resulting from infeed• number of rotations (minimum and maximum)• cutting speed (minimum and maximum)• infeed (minimum and maximum)• length of travel path with infeed speed• traversing time with infeed speed• traversing time in rapid speed• tool changing time• cut material volume• sum of the calculated times

Select NC

program analysis

The NC program analysis is started in the main menu of the automatic mode byselecting the menu item �calculate NC data� after you have entered the name ofthe NC program to be analyzed

After the NC program is run the user can enter additional information, for instance,name of the customer, of the part, special tool description among other things. Thisinformation can be displayed on the screen together with the graphicalrepresentation of the machining and of the technology data. It can also be printedout page by page.

When for instance the following message:

N100 T0404 ( STRAIGHT ROUGHING OUTSIDE

has been included as a comment after the tool change this comment is displayed inabbreviated form in the table with other analyzed technology information during thegraphical representation of the machining process.

It is also possible to include the technology information (without graphics) into thecorresponding NC program. It then appears as a comment at the end of theanalyzed NC program.

NC Program Analysis


Result of the NC

program analysis:

travel path

indication with the

individual

machining

processes (part 1)

Result of the NC

program analysis:

travel path

indication with the

individual

machining

processes (part 2)

Result of the NC

program analysis:

table of overview

with technological

information

Result of the NC

program analysis

3D-View

© MTS GmbH 1998 233

11 3D-View

The performance of the 3D view of the CNC simulator turning 6 has beenconsiderably extended and offers now almost unlimited possibilities for three-dimensional viewing of the work part.The 3D view can be called at any time of the CNC simulation and it always showsthe current machining situation. Within the 3D menu the view can be changed withthe following functions:

3D menu: Adjusting the viewing angle

• Rotation of the work part in the X axis (each step 5°)• Inclination of the work part in the Y axis (each step 5°)• Rotation of the work part in the Z axis = location of the C axis (each step 1°)• Zoom• Viewing distance from the work part (far away, close viewing point)

3D view:

3D menu for the

selection of the 3D

view

3D-Interface: Adjusting the viewing angle

• Free-selected C cut

From a rotation symmetrical basic form of the work part a circular sector is cutout. The size of the circular sector (opening angle of the wedge) as well as thelocation of its both limiting areas can be selected freely. Variants of the C cut arethe full cut, half cut and free-selected cut.

• Free-selected Z cut

With the help of the Z cut the work part can be cut at any point of the Z axis inthe X, Y plane. The orientation of the Z cut indicates which of the so createdtwo sides of the work part is currently shown.

In the 3D view the different type of machining operations are indicated in color asfollows:

grey: geometries generated by rotation symmetrical machining operationsblue: geometries generated by machining with driven toolsred: threading generated by milling operations

3D-View


3D view:

3D interface for the

free-selectable

location of the

C cut

3D view:

3D interface menu

for the free-

selectable location

of the Z cut

3D view:

view of the work

part as a 3D full

view without

section cut

CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle

© MTS GmbH 1998 235

12 CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle

12.1 Preface

FThe counter spindle is an optional software supplement to the MTS CNCsimulator Turning 6. This function has to be bought separately. The performancecharacteristics described below are available only if this supplementary software isavailable.

Counter spindle The free-configurable counter spindle on a track of its own is in the first placecreated to take over the work part for complete machining especially for rear sidemachining. Either the counter spindle or the tailstock can be configured.

Programming

code

For machining on counter spindle a complete programming code including theapplication of driven tools is available.

Work part transfer The counter spindle makes it first of all possible to take over work parts from themain spindle or work parts which have already been machined. Furthermore, thecounter spindle enables to take the work part from the main spindle and to transferit to the counter spindle after trimming. The counter spindle consequently allowsreversal or complete machining.

Collision

monitoring

The travel movement of the counter spindle is time controlled and is fullyintegrated in the mathematically exact collision monitoring within the machiningspace of the machine tool.

Set-up mode If counter spindle is configured it is possible to select the clamping device and toinsert the work part in counter spindle in set-up mode in work part and clampingdevice management.

The work part can be inserted either separately one by one in the main or counterspindle or at once in both of them.For the take-over of the machining tools a special turret type vertically to theturning axis is automatically selected allowing tool application for machining on themain and counter spindle.

Machining with

driven tools on the

counter spindle

CNC-Turning with the Counter Spindle


Activating

counter spindle

The functions and characteristics of the counter spindle are activated in the CNCmachine configuration in which the counter spindle is configured instead of thetailstock.

If you start the CNC simulator with such a configuration it is possible for you to usethe counter spindle.

Programming key

for counter

spindle

The same machining possibilities (G and M commands, cycles) which areavailable on the main spindle of the CNC control are available on the counterspindle as well.Especially for the programming of the work part transfer, as well as for thedifferentiation of machining operations on the main and counter spindle new G andM commands were necessary to improve the functional applicability of theseoperations.

Machining states In the MTS CNC simulator Turning 6 a CNC machine with a counter spindle hasthe machining possibilities G29, G30, G28:

G29 Machining on the main spindle (standard)

Machining takes place on the main spindle. The coordinate system,operation and programming of the CNC simulator remain unchanged. Whenstarting the CNC simulator this machining status is activated as a standard.

G30 Work part transfer

This command initiates the work part transfer from the main spindle to thecounter spindle. The counter spindle can be moved to a programmedposition for the work part take-over. Prior to the subsequent machining thework part can be trimmed. During the work part transfer there are additionalswitch commands available for the main and counter spindle. Please notethat for G30 the coordinate system of the last machining status is valid. Thisis usually G29.

G28 Machining on the counter spindle

Machining takes place on the counter spindle, i.e. the current coordinatesystem refers to the counter spindle as well as to switch and technologycommands.

In the following passages only the special travel and switch commands forthe programming of a CNC machine with counter spindle are beingdiscussed.

For the programming of rotation-symmetrical machining as well as for theapplication of driven tools on counter spindle the same programminginstructions are valid as for machining on the main spindle. Theseinstructions (rotation-symmetrical machining) as well as in chapter 4 of thismanual regarding the application of driven tools.

Configuration

© MTS GmbH 1998 237

12.2 Configuration

Within the MTS configuration program of the CNC simulator there are extensivepossibilities to adapt the software to the machine-specific conditions of the CNCcontrol available.

If a machine with counter spindle was selected as the �machine type� in theconfiguration of the machine to be used, then the counter spindle is additionallyavailable. Here it is possible to set-up the counter spindle.

Configuration of the

machine:

Set-up of the

counter spindle

The following parameters of the counter spindle can be adjusted:

• geometrical dimensions of the shell surface• diameter of the counter spindle• spindle jut-out• type of the chucks• minimum clamping length on the counter spindle• travel area of the counter spindle• maximum infeed• minimum and maximum number of rotations of the counter spindle• changes of the coordinate system by mirroring the NC axes Y and Z• availability of a C axis• changing rotation direction for circular interpolation on the counter spindle,

separately for turning and milling• changing the rotation direction of the cutting radius compensation, separately for

turning and milling• relative rotation direction of the main and counter spindle in relation to each

other

G29 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle


12.3 Programming the Counter Spindle

12.3.1 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle G29

Function The command G29 informs the CNC control that the subsequent machiningoperation is carried out on the main spindle. The control consequently activatesthe most recently used work part coordinate system for the main spindle. The zeropoint of the coordinate system is then set again to the value which was last validon the main spindle.

NC command G29

FFWhen starting the CNC simulator machining status G29 is in general active. Thismeans that G29 needs to be explicitly programmed in the NC program only if atool transfer (G30) or machining on the counter spindle (G28) was carried out.

Transfer

command

In G29 the following switch commands are valid for the main spindle:

M03 Spindle rotation direction right (CW)

M04 Spindle rotation direction left (CCW)

M05 Spindle rotation off

M07 Coolant 1 on

M08 Coolant 2 on

M09 Coolant off

M10 Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle

M11 Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle

M15 Chucking jaws clamping inside for rotating spindle

M16 Chucking jaws clamping outside for rotating spindle

Work Part Transfer G30

© MTS GmbH 1998 239

12.3.2 Work Part Transfer G30

Function The command G30 initiates the work part transfer from the main to the counterspindle.

NC command G30

FFIn machining state G30 it is possible to program the position movements of thecounter spindle with G00 and G01 and the address V. In addition to this a numberof supplementary M and G commands are available in the machining state G30.

Transfer

commands for the

main spindle in

G30




M07 Coolant 1 on

M08 Coolant 2 on

M09 Coolant off


M11 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle

X... Diameter for the clearance of the chucking jaws



M19 [C...]Spindle halt at specified angle position

C... Angular position of the main spindle at specified angle

M28 Main spindle moment-free

Switch commands

for the counter

spindle in G30




M57 Coolant 1 on

M58 Coolant 2 on

M59 Coolant off

M60 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping inside for standing spindle

X... Diameter for closing chucking jaws

M61 [X...] Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle

X... Diameter for closing chucking jaws



M69 [C...]Spindle halt at specified angle position

C... Angular position of the main spindle at specified angle

M78 Counter spindle moment-free

M95 Switch on cleaning air blow of counter spindle

M96 Switch off cleaning air blow of counter spindle

Switch commands

for the main and

counter spindle in

G30

M37 Switch on parallel run of main and counter spindle

M38 Switch off parallel run of main and counter spindle

G59 Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point (when Programming Travel Movements)


12.3.3 Incremental Shift of the Counter Spindle Reference Point(when Programming Travel Movements) G59

Function As a supplement to the counter spindle zero point a so-called counter spindlereference point is also identified. In standard setting these points are identical.With the command G59 it is possible to shift the counter spindle reference pointincrementally. All coordinate data refer to this point when programming the travelmovements of the counter spindle.

NC command G59 V...

Address V... Value of the incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point

The direction of the shift is defined by the sign of the address V:

V+... = Shift in the direction of the positive Z axisV-... = Shift in the direction of the negative Z axis

Incremental shift of

the counter spindle

reference point

= active work part zero point (in G29 and G30)

= counter spindle reference point (example: identical with the counter spindlezero point)

= value of the incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point

= new counter spindle reference point (example: outer left side of thechucking jaws)

Programming

example

Incremental shift of

the counter spindle

reference point

...N045 G30N050 G59 V-160...

Work part transfer (begin)incremental shift of the counter spindle reference pointon the outside surface of the chucking jaws, i.e. 16 mmin direction of the negative Z axis

Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid Speed Movement G00

© MTS GmbH 1998 241

12.3.4 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle in Rapid SpeedMovement G00

Function The counter spindle can be positioned for the tool transfer with the command G00and the address V.

NC command G00 V...

Address V... Z coordinate of the target point of the counter spindle travel movement

Please note that the Z coordinate of the travel movement refers to thereference point of the counter spindle. In the standard set-up this point isidentical with the counter spindle zero point. However, it is possible to shiftthe counter spindle reference point incrementally with the command G59 toposition it, for instance, on the outer edge of the clamping jaws.

FFIf the address V has been programmed in G30 instead of the address X themachine then moves the current tool to the indicated position.

Counter spindle

movement in rapid

speed (without

shifting the counter

spindle reference

point)


= counter spindle reference point (without incremental shift with G59)

= counter spindle movement in rapid speed

Programming

example

Counter spindle

movement in rapid

speed

without G59

...N045 G30N050 G00 V+130...

Work part transition (begin)Counter spindle in rapid speed movement:The counter spindle reference point is moved tothe value Z=+130 mm.

Programming

example

Counter spindle

movement in rapid

speed

with G59

...N045 G30N050 G59 V-160

N055 G00 V-30...

Work part transition (begin)Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference pointon the outside surface of the chucking jaws, i.e.counter spindle in rapid speed: the counter spindle inrapid speed 160 mm to the negative Z axis.The counter spindle reference point is moved to thecoordinate Z=30. This value corresponds to theclamping depth of the counter spindle.

G01 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F in mm/min


12.3.5 Travel Movement of the Counter Spindle with Infeed F inmm/min G01

Function With the command G01 and the address V the counter spindle can be positionedfor the tool transfer with the infeed F. Hereby the counter spindle can move up to apoint of collision of the clamping device and the work part. This position can thenbe taken to clamp the tool and to continue machining.

NC command G01 V... F...

Addresses V... Z coordinate of the target point of the counter spindle travel movementPlease note that in G30 the coordinate system of the machining state isactivated in which G30 has been called. The Z coordinate of the travelmovement to be programmed under the address V refers to the counterspindle reference point. In standard setting this point is identical with thecounter spindle zero point. The counter spindle reference point can,however, be incrementally shifted with the command G59, for instance tohave the outer edge positioned on the chucking jaws.

F... In feed of the travel movement

FFIf the address V is programmed in machining state G30 instead of the address Xthe machine takes the current tool (instead of the counter spindle) to the indicatedposition.

Counter spindle in

rapid speed

movement

(without shifting

the counter spindle

reference point)



= travel movement of the counter spindle in infeed

Programming

example

Counter spindle

travel movement in

infeed F

a) without G59...N045 G30N050 G01 V+130 F1...

Work part transfer (begin)Counter spindle movement in infeed F: The counter spindlereference point is moved to the value Z=+130 mm.

b) with G59...N045 G30N050 G59 V-160

N055 G01 V-30 F1...

Work part transfer (begin)Incremental shift of the counter spindle reference point tothe outer edge of the chucking jaws, i.e. travel in infeed F by160 mm in direction of the negative Z axis.The counter spindle reference point is moved to coordinateZ=30. This value also corresponds to the clamping depth ofthe counter spindle

Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point G27

© MTS GmbH 1998 243

12.3.6 Counter Spindle to the Counter Spindle Reference Point G27

The command G27 effects that the counter spindle zero point is moved to theconfigured counter spindle reference point in rapid speed. The counter spindlereference point is located at the extreme right edge of the travel area of thecounter spindle in the machine room.

NC command G27

Counter spindle

movement to the

counter spindle

reference point

= current work part zero point (in machining states G29 and G30)


= counter spindle movement to the counter spindle reference point

G28 Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle


12.3.7 Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle G28

Function With the command G28 the CNC control is being informed that the subsequentmachining takes place on the counter spindle. Hereby G28 activates thecoordinate system for the counter spindle. The location of the zero point of thiscoordinate system can be defined when calling the command with optionaladdresses. Please, note that G27 (counter spindle movement to the referencepoint) should be programmed prior to programming G28.

NC Command G28 [O...] [Z...]

If G28 is programmed without address the counter spindle zero point isautomatically taken as the new zero point of the coordinate system.

Optional

addresses

O50 Take-over of the counter spindle reference point as a new zero point

of the coordinate system (standard)

O51 Taking the present work part zero point of the work part on the main

spindle as a new zero point of the coordinate system of the work part

on the counter spindle

O51 Z... Taking the present work part zero point as a new zero point of the

coordinate system and a subsequent incremental shift of the new

zero point by the value of Z with reference to the work part zero point

Mirroring Z axis Mirroring the Z axis for machining on counter spindle is controlled by aconfiguration variable. Depending on the setting of these variables G28 eitherrepresents the mirroring of the Z axis or retains its direction. The location of thezero point depends on the fact if the mirroring of Z axis was made or not.

Zero point shifts Absolute and incremental zero point shifts programmed with G28 refer to the newzero point (= new work part zero point) specified in G28.

Switch commands In machining state G28 the following switch commands are valid for the counterspindle:




M07 Coolant 1 on

M08 Coolant 2 on

M09 Coolant off


M11 Chucking jaws clamping outside for standing spindle



Switching on Machining on the Counter Spindle G28

© MTS GmbH 1998 245

Zero and reference

points on the main

and counter spindle

= machine zero point

= work part zero point on the main spindle

= work part zero point on the counter spindle

= counter spindle zero point = counter spindle reference point

FFPlease, note the difference between the counter spindle zero point and the so-called counter spindle reference point. In standard setting these points areidentical. The counter spindle reference point can, however, be shiftedincrementally with the command G59.Consequently, it is reasonable for the programming of the work part transfer toshift for instance the counter spindle reference point on to the front edge of thechucks.Please, note that when programming the travel movements of the counter spindlethe coordinate data refer to the reference point of the counter spindle.

Programming

example

Work part transfer

and machining on

the counter spindle

...N045 G30N050 G00 V+130.000

N055 M60N060 M11N065 G27N070 G28 O51 Z-100...

Work part transfer (start)Counter spindle in rapid speed movement: The counterspindle reference point is placed on the value Z=+130mm.Chucks of the counter spindle inwards (=close).Chucks of the main spindle outwards (=open).Reference path of the counter spindle.Switching on machining on the counter spindle: The workpart zero point is taken as the new origin of the coordinatesystem in Z shifted by 100 mm to the left.

G05 Bar feed


12.3.8 Bar feed for work parts in the main spindle G05

Function The bar moves to a programmed position or to the end stop mounted in the counterspindle.

Conditions 1) The bar is clamped with a collet chuck!

2) The selected machining plane is the turning plane G14!

NC Block 1) M702) G05 [W...] [F...]

Optional Addresses W incremental Z value for the shifting in the Z direction

F Feedrate in mm/min

Programming example ...M70 open the collet chuckG05 the bar moves to the end stop mounted in the... counter spindle

...M70 open the collet chuckG05 W50 F200.000 the bar moves 50 mm incremental in the positive X-direction... with the feedrate of 300mm/min

open the collet chuck

the bar moves to the

end stop mounted in

the counter spindle

CNC Turning with Driven Tools

© MTS GmbH 1998 247

13 CNC Turning with Driven Tools

13.1 Preface

FDriven tools is an optional software supplement to the MTS CNC simulatorTurning 6. It can be separately purchased as a supplementary license. Thefunctions described below are available only if this software supplement is installedin your system.

5 controllable NC

axes:

X, Z, Y, C and B

The CNC simulator version 6 with driven tools represents a CNC machine tool with5 controllable NC axes. Unlike the CNC simulator 5.x the traditional Cartesiancoordinate system for turning with the main axes X and Z is extended by the main

axis Y. This means that machining with driven tools can be programmed in a newCartesian coordinate system offset the rotation center point (Y=0).

In addition to the above there is a rotation axis C available. It enables you tocontrol exactly the rotation of the work part in the Z axis. The rotation axis C canbe both positioned exactly and interpolated. In this way it is possible to realize toolgeometry�s by overlapping a rotation in C with a simultaneous movement of thetool in X and/or Z.

The swivel axis B of the turret is new as well. By programming B the turret isrotated in the turret reference point. It enables you to realize milling with driventools on all surfaces and on all machining planes.

Location and

direction of the NC

axes X, Z, Y and C

Swivel axis B of the

turret

= Turretreference point

= Turret rotationpoint

= Tool referencepoint



Machining planes The NC programming syntax of the CNC simulator turning 6 depends on thecurrently active machining plane. The following machining planes can be selected:

• Turning plane (G14)

• Standard plane (G15)

• Free-definable plane (G16)

• Front surface (G17)

• Shell surface (G18)

• Chord surface (G19)

In addition to the turning plane (G14) the driven tools are available on all othermachining planes (G15-G19) as well. Conventional rotation-symmetricalmachining is programmed on the turning plane (G14).

Overview of the

machining planes

of the CNC

simulator turning 6

for machining with

driven tools

Programming

code

In addition to the commands G and M of the MTS syntax on turning plane (G14)the programming code for driven tools offers a set of new cycles for the applicationof driven tools.

Preface

© MTS GmbH 1998 249

As to the new cycles for driven tools machining and multiple cycles aredifferentiated.

Machining cycles The machining type and method as well as the geometry and additionalinformation on the NC machining is programmed in the machining cycles.

Multiple cycles Using a multiple cycle a previously specified machining cycle is controlled to beperformed either once or several times.

In general, the following machining and multiple cycles are available on machiningplanes G16, G17, G18 and G19:

Available Machining Cycles Pages

G60 Face Milling Cycle in G16: 262 and in G19: 304

G61 Drilling Cycle in G16: 264, in G17:278, in G18: 293 and in G19: 306

G62 Thread Tapping in G16: 265, in G17:279, in G18: 294 and in G19: 307

G63 Reaming/Boring in G16: 266, in G17:280, in G18: 295 and in G19: 308

G64 Square Pocket/in Groove in G16: 267, in G17:281, in G18: 296 and in G19: 309

G65 Circular Pocket in G16: 268, in G17:282, in G18: 297 and in G19: 310

G66 Tapping in G16: 270, in G17:283, in G18: 298 and in G19: 311

Available Multiple Cycle Pages

G67 Cycle on a Circle in G16: 270, in G17:284, in G18: 299 and in G19: 312

G68 Cycle on a Radius in G16: 271, in G17:285, in G18: 300 and in G19: 313

G69 Cycle at a Point in G16: 272, in G17: 286, in G18: 301 and in G19: 314

General

programming

hints

Selecting Machining Plane on C Axis

The functions and features of driven tools are activated in an NC program byselecting one of the machining planes of the C axis (G15-G19).

In general, the main spindle is switched off (M05) when starting and the C axis isplaced in the reference position (milling angle C=0).

The further application possibilities of the C axis depend in the first place on theselected machining plane:

• When calling G16 (free-definable plane) and G19 (shell and mill surface) the Caxis is positioned at a certain rotation angle. This value remains valid until someother plane is selected. This means that on the plane G16 and G19 it is notpossible to re-position the C axis any more.

• The plane G15 (standard plane with linear interpolation), G17 (front face) andG18 (shell surface) are called without a specified rotation angle of the C axis.On these planes it is possible to position C at any rotation angle. Furthermore, itis possible to overlap the rotation movement of the C axis with the movement ofthe tool (interpolation of several NC axis).

After one of the planes G15, G16, G17, G18 and G19 have been selected themachine commands (e.g. M03/M04/M05) as well as the following programmedtechnology data refer to the auxiliary drive of the driven milling tools on the turret.



The technology parameters of the auxiliary drive can be programmed as follows:

G97 S... Rate of rotation of the toolG96 S... Cutting speed of the toolG94 F... Infeed in mm/minG95 F... Infeed in mm/U

Programming Machining Cycles

Programming machining with driven tools can be made in the NC program indifferent ways. In addition to the standard commands there are efficient machiningand multiple cycles available.

The machining cycle (G60-G66) is always programmed first in an NC program. ThisNC block generates no machining as such. Only if a multiple cycle (G67-G69) isprogrammed in one of the succeeding NC blocks the machining is carried out.

This standard situation can be changed by programming the machining cycle andthe multiple cycle in one NC block. The following facts are to be considered:

• The complete machining cycle with all necessary addresses has to beprogrammed first.

• The addresses of the machining cycle are followed by the G command of thedesired multiple cycle as well as the necessary address for it.

• In such an NC block with machining and multiple cycles none of the addressesis allowed to appear more than once.

The following information is of great importance regarding the NC programming ofthe CNC simulator turning 6:

FFThe programmable addresses of machining and multiple cycles depend on

the currently active machining plane.

Due to this reason the cycles of the driven tools are described below groupedaccording to the machining plane.

Switching off Machining with Driven Tools

By selecting the turning plane G14 the functions and features of the driven tools arede-activated again.

The selection of G14 means that the auxiliary drive (M05) is switched off. The Caxis remains with spindle halt (M05) at the position, which was taken after the lastprogrammed movement on the C axis plane.

The machine commands M03/M04/M05 as well as the technology dataprogrammed after it refer again to the most recent active spindle (main or counterspindle).

Configuration

© MTS GmbH 1998 251

13.2 Configuration

The MTS configuration program of the CNC simulator contains extensivepossibilities for adjusting the software to the special features of the machine tooland CNC control available.

If a CNC machine with driven tools was selected in the configuration of the machinetool the additional configuration option �driven tools� is available. The correspondingset-ups can be made here.

Configuration

machine:

Set-ups for the

driven tools

The following parameters can be varied:

• the turret positions to be operated on driven tools can be specified• the number of rotations in the different gear stages of the CNC machine can be

defined• it can be specified if the X coordinates programmed in the NC program should

be interpreted as a diameter or radius in the different machining planes withdriven tools.

FDefinition of the interpretation of the X coordinate has a decisive influence on theprogramming of machining processes with driven tools. It is recommended tomachine on all planes with radius programming. This set-up is used in thestandard configurations for CNC turning machines with driven tools supplied byMTS.

FWhen configuring CNC machines with driven tools, also note the configurationmenus �main spindle�, �turret� and eventually also �counter spindle�. In thesemenus the availability of the controllable NC axes C, Y and B needs to be set-up.

FIn this manual all the programming clarifications on driven tools are based

on the MTS standard machine configuration �MTS GSP AWZ� as well as on

the MTS standard configuration �MTS CNCT GSP AWZ� for the CNC control

for turning.

G14 Turning Plane


13.3 Turning Plane G14

Function The turning plane is selected with the command G14. In this plane it is possible torealize conventional, rotation-symmetrical tool geometries. When selecting theturning plane G14 no driven tools are available.

As a zero point of the coordinate system the most recently used work part zeropoint is used. Its value depends on the activated machining status at the time whenG14 is selected. G29 (machining on the main spindle) and G28 (machining on thecounter spindle) are possible for the selection.

For the selection of the turning plane G14 the turret has to be positioned in therotation center (Y=0). If the CNC machine has a controllable Y axis a correspondingG command has to be programmed prior to calling G14.

Programming takes place with the Cartesian coordinates X, Z, whereby X is to beentered as a diameter value.

NC Command G14

Programming

hints

If the turret was rotated in rotation axis B on some other machining plane prior tothe selection of G14 this rotation remains valid on the rotation plane. Prior tomaking any further rotation-symmetrical machining the B axis in NC programshould be first switched back to B=0 (for instance the command: G01 B0). Thisguarantees that the current tool correction values are processed correctly.A light swivel of the turret (small B values) changes the recessing and withdrawalangle of the tools. This can have positive and negative consequences for theprogrammed machining.

Location and

direction of the NC

axes X and Z on

turning plane G14

Coordinate entries

of a point on

turning plane G14

Standard Plane G15

© MTS GmbH 1998 253

13.4 Standard Plane G15

Function The standard plane is selected with the command G15. By selecting the planeG15 the control is instructed to carry out linear interpolation of the programmedcoordinates in the axes X, Z, Y, C.

The programmed tool movements refer hereby to the spatial Cartesian coordinatesystem X, Z, Y.

The interpretation of the X coordinates as a radius or diameter value is configurableon the G15 machining plane. In general, it is recommended to work with radiusprogramming on all planes. This set-up is also used in the standard configurationsof the CNC turning machines supplied by MTS. In this manual all clarifications onprogramming with driven tools are based on a configuration with radiusprogramming on all machining planes with driven tools.

On the standard plane driven tools are available for machining. It is however notpossible to program machining cycles.

As a zero point of the coordinate system the most recently active work part zeropoint is used. Its value depends on the machining status activated when selectingG15. G29 (machining on the main spindle) or G28 (machining on the counterspindle) are possible as machining status.

The turret can be moved in Y and additionally rotated in B axis. The rotation axis Bcan only be positioned here. Machining with the interpolation of the B axis is notpossible.

NC Command G15

Location and

direction of the NC

axes X, Z, Y and C

on standard plane

with linear

interpolation G15

Entry of the

coordinates of a

point on standard

plane with linear

interpolation G15

G16 Free-definable Plane


13.5 Free-definable Plane G16

Function Free-definable planes can be used to program milling operations with driven toolsand a turret, that is rotated in B.

In general the turret is tilted in such an angle B that the tool is located vertically tothe plane to be machined. The rotation angle of the turret is within the range -90°<B<+90° for a vertically clamped tool. For machining with a horizontally clampedtool it is reasonable to use the angle range 0°<B<+180°.

Using the free-definable machining plane correspondingly requires the availability ofthe B axis on the CNC machine. Eccentric milling requires additionally the Y axis.

For the realization of simple NC programming for milling with swiveled tools a newcoordinate system is introduced by selecting machining on a free-definable planeG16. The coordinate axes YG16, ZG16 are hereby allocated to any plane. The thirdcoordinate axis of the Cartesian coordinate system XG16 is located vertically on thespecified plane directed off from the work part.

Example of free-

definable plane G16

with the coordinate

system XG16, YG16,

ZG16

The definition of a new coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 is made by selecting anyplane G16 in reference to the coordinate system X, Y, Z of the turning plane G14.The new coordinate system XG16, YG16, ZG16 is specified by the rotation in the Y axis(rotation angle A) and by the shift of the new zero point in X and/or Z. Theadditional definition of the positioning angle of the rotation axis C defines thelocation of the free-definable plane G16.The value of this rotation angle A specifies simultaneously the angle B, which is theangle the tool turret has to be rotated for machining on the deliberate plane.

Location of the

coordinate system

on free-definable

plane G16

Original coordinate system of the turning plane G14

Shifted and rotated coordinate system of the free-definable plane G16

Free-definable Plane G16

© MTS GmbH 1998 255

Location variants of

a free-definable

plane G16 for

manufacturing of

shell and mill

surfaces

FPlease note in the above figure that the work part was first positioned on thecorresponding point of the rotation axis C prior to starting the machining on thefree-definable plane G16.

Machining processes on the free-definable plane G16 are programmed in theCartesian plane coordinates Y and Z of the new coordinates system XG16, YG16,ZG16. The infeed value within this plane is entered using the coordinate X.

Values of the

coordinates of a

free-definable plane

G16



Selection Alternative 1 of a free-definable plane

NC command G16 C... X... Z... V... W... I.../K...

Addresses C The rotation angle of the rotation axis on which the work part is

positioned (identified) when selecting the plane.

When switching on the CNC machine all controllable NC axis are beingreferenced. The reference point for the rotation angle 0° of the rotation axis Cis located on the positive A axis of the machine coordinate system. Byclamping the raw part the location of the value C=0° is defined in relation tothe work part. After this it is possible to make the exact positioning of thework part for machining with driven tools by programming the address C.

X, Z Coordinates of the starting point (P1) of one of the straight lines

defining the plane (entry in the coordinate system of G14)

V, W Coordinates of the end point (P2) of one of the straight lines defining

the plane (entry in the coordinate system of G14)

I/KOne coordinate of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16,

ZG16 (entry in the coordinate system of G14)

The control calculates automatically the second coordinate for the definitionof the location of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16,ZG16. For this purpose the geometrical values of the straight lines defining theplane are used.

FFThe coordinates X, Z, V, W, I and K refer to the original coordinate system of theturning plane G14 when selecting the plane.When quitting the plane G16 the zero point is repositioned to the zero point of theturning plane G14.

Addresses of

the selection

alternative 1

of free-definable

plane G16

Plane G16 (YG16, ZG16 plane) specified by the line P1-P2

Free-definable Plane G16

© MTS GmbH 1998 257

Selection Alternative 2 of a free-definable plane

NC command G16 X... Z... A... I.../K... C...

Addresses C The rotation angle of the rotation axis on which the work part is

positioned (identified) when selecting the plane

X, Z Coordinates of the starting point (P1) of one of the lines defining the

plane

This point is also the rotation point of the lines.

A Rotation angle of the lines defining the plane in Y axis in relation to the

direction of the positive Z axis of the G14 plane

I/KOne coordinate of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16,

ZG16 (entry in the coordinate system of G14)

The control calculates automatically the second coordinate for the definitionof the position of the new zero point of the coordinate system XG16, YG16,ZG16. For this purpose the geometrical values of the lines defining the planeare used.

FFWhen selecting the plane the coordinates in X, Z, I and K refer to the originalcoordinate system of the turning plane G14.When quitting the plane G15 the zero point is re-positioned on the turning planeG14.

Addresses of the

selection

alternative 2 of


G16

Free-definable plane G16 (YG16, ZG16 plane) specified by the point P1 and the angle A



Machining a boring

pattern on a face

surface

programmed with


G16

Programming

example

Selection of the


G16 to machine a

boring pattern on a

plane surface G16

...N040 G94 F120 S1800 T0909N045 G00 X+150 Z+30N050 G16 X+60 Z-10 K-10 A-10 C+45N055 G01 B-10 M03N060 G01 X+30 Z-10N065 G60 X-20 I+90 K+40 V+60 W-90 O011N070 G69N075 F80 S1200 T1515 M03N080 G01 X+20 Z-50N085 G61 X-50 K+20 A+10 B+10 D+10 W+30N090 G67 Y+0 Z-55 J+0 E+360 R+20 S008...

Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16 G16

© MTS GmbH 1998 259

13.6 Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16

The geometrical programming entries for machining processes on a free-definableplane rotated in B axis are made based on the analysis of the 2D-CAD drawing ofthe work part to be machined. The process can be analyzed as follows:

Initial Considerations

1. First find out which machining elements (curved surfaces, pockets, grooves,drillings) of the work part require for their machining the application of a turretrotated in B axis.

Example for one

machining task on

plane G16 (part 1)

Ø The above example shows a part of a drawing. The production task includesthe machining of two curved surfaces and two drillings which are located at180° angle to each other. These four machining elements require theapplication of a tool rotated in B axis.

2. Now group all the machining elements which can be machined with one rotationangle of the B axis and those which can be machined with one rotation angle ofthe C axis.

Example for one

machining task on

plane G16 (part 2)

Ø As a result of this second step you have two groups of elements to bemachined:

The curved surface as well as the drilling of the group 1 are to be machinedin the position C=0° of the rotation axis. Both elements to be machined canbe machined at the same angle position B of the turret.

For machining the elements of the group 2 the rotation axis has to bepositioned C=180°. The same angle B can be used here as well.

3. The angle of the C axis as well as the location of the new coordinate systemXG16, YG16, ZG16 is defined by selecting the free-definable plane G16. Duringmachining on this plane they cannot be changed any more. This means that inthe current example, two different, free-definable planes G16 have to beselected one after the other to be able to realize all machining processes.

G16 Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16


Defining Geometrical Entries for the Selection of the Free-Definable PlaneG16

After having clarified which elements can be manufactured together, thegeometrical values required for the definition and selection of the free-definableplane G16 have to be specified. This is done in the following for the productionelements of the group 1 of the above example.

Example for a

production task

on plane G16 (part 3)

Production elements group 1 for whose production the free-definable planeG16 is to be selected

Straight line 1 on the X, Z plane (Y=0) indicating the rotation of the free-definable plane to be programmed in the Y axis of the coordinate system ofthe turning plane G14 (angle A)

Straight line 2 on the X, Y plane (Z=0) indicating the rotation of the free-definable plane to be programmed in Z axis of the coordinate system of theturning plane G14 (angle position of the rotation axis C)

For the programming of machining with driven tools the turret has to be rotatedin such an angle so as to have the milling tool vertically positioned to theselected free-definable plane G16. In this example the width of the angle Aalso specifies the width of the angle B.

FFor the exact definition of the angles A and C based on the CAD drawing it isnecessary that the technical representation meets the following requirements:

• The longitudinal section of the work part in X, Z plane (Y=0) has to berepresented from an angle with the work part rotated in Z axis prior to therepresentation. This means that the straight line 2 in the X and Y plane (Z=0)runs parallel to the Y axis.

• A side view or a section view (X, Y plane) of the work part has to indicate clearlythe angle of the rotation axis C in which the machining is carried out.

Programming the Selection of the Free-definable Plane G16 G16

© MTS GmbH 1998 261

FIf several free-definable planes G16 are to be programmed for one work part thefollowing items have to be additionally considered:

• A side view or a section view (X, Y plane) has to indicate clearly the respectiverotation angle of the rotation axis C. It describes the location of the various free-definable planes to each other.

• For each element or each group of elements to be manufactured a longitudinalsection in X, Z plane (Y=0) has to be drawn whereby the work part has to berotated in the Z axis prior to it so as to have the straight line 2 in X, Z plane(Z=0) parallel to the Y axis. Otherwise, it is not possible to determine the angle Aexactly from the drawing.

Geometrical data

which is not

sufficient for the

selection of the

plane G16 in a CAD

drawing

The above example shows a part of a drawing which in its present form does notcontain enough information for the definition and selection of the free-definableplane G16

A group of elements to be manufactured for whose production the free-definable plane G16 is to be selected.

The straight line in X, Y plane (Z=0) does not run parallel to the Y axis.

The drawing shows clearly the angle of the rotation axis C for both of the groupselements to be manufactured, however, it does not give any information on therotation in longitudinal section in Y axis for the indicated group of elements to bemanufactured. In such a case the value of the angle A has to be either explicitlyindicated or represented in some other elevation.

Free-definable Plane: G16 Face Milling Cycle


13.7 Machining Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16

13.7.1 Face Milling Cycle G60

Function With the machining cycle G60 the machining of a face area is programmed. A facearea is an area parallel to YG16ZG16 plane whose location in XG16 can be freelydefined. The cycle machines the programmed face area with one infeed or inseveral infeeds. The travel paths of the milling tool can be optimized if necessary.In addition to G60 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle, for instance G69(cycle at a point). By programming the multiple cycle the machining cycle whichwas most recently specified is carried out.

NC command G60 W... X... V... K... [I...] [O...] [O...]

FFWhen programming the addresses of the machining cycle all the coordinate datarefer in the following to the coordinate system XG16YG16ZG16 of the plane G16.For this cycle it is necessary to have the Y axis available in the CNC machine.

Addresses W Z coordinate of the end point of the face milling area

The starting point of the face milling area is defined by the Z coordinatebased on the multiple cycle programmed subsequent to it. If Z has notprogrammed in the multiple cycle the value of the current tool position isused when calling the cycle.

X X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the face milling area

Unlike for CNC milling the coordinate entry for the infeed is programmed asan absolute value in this cycle.

V Half machining width in Y for machining the face milling area

Machining face milling area takes place in Y direction starting from the Ycoordinate with the value -V and moving towards the Y coordinate with thevalue +V.

K Infeed in X direction (incremental)

The infeed takes place incrementally starting from the X coordinate of thestarting point of the machining cycle. The interpretation of the infeed value Kas a radius or as a diameter depends on the current machine configuration.In the MTS standard configuration the radius programming is in general usedfor all machining planes with driven tools.

If the absolute value is located between 2K and K the control makes theinfeed twice. Half of the remaining infeed value is used as an infeed value foreach run.

Optional Addresses I Infeed in Z direction (infeed entry as a percentage of the milling tool

diameter)

The infeed in Z direction depends on the tool used for processing the cycle.If I has not been programmed then the control carries out the infeed with avalue corresponding 75% of the width (diameter) of the current milling toolas a standard. Values which are larger than or identical with 100% are notacceptable for I.

The sign of the address I specifies whether the machining is carried outsynchron or as conventional milling:

I+ = synchron machining (standard)

I- = conventional machining

Face Milling Cycle Free-definable Plane: G16

© MTS GmbH 1998 263

O Absolute or incremental entry of the Z coordinate of the end point W of

the face milling area

O70 Z coordinate of the end point W absolute (standard)

O71 Z coordinate of the end point W incremental

O Optimizing the travel paths when processing cycles

O10 not optimized machining (standard)

O11 optimized machining in Y direction

If 011 is programmed the tool moves in Y from -Ymin to +Ymin, whereby Ymin isthe smallest value calculated for the current infeed to generate theprogrammed face milling area. In this case the programming of the addressV has no relevance.

NC addresses for

the programming of

a face milling cycle

G60 on free-

definable plane G16

Starting point of the plane area. The Z coordinate is defined in the multiplecycle or by the current tool position.

End point of the face milling area (X, W)

Free-definable Plane: G61 Drilling Cycle


13.7.2 Drilling Cycle G61

Function With the machining cycle G61 the machining of a drilling is programmed.Machining is carried out either as one or as multiple infeed. The infeed can beinterrupted for chip breaking and chip cleaning. After each infeed the tool returnsto the outer edge of the drilling hole. After a drilling hole has been completed thetool returns to the clearance plane. In addition to G61 a multiple cycle has to beprogrammed, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiplecycle the most recently defined machining cycle is carried out.

NC command G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

FFWhen programming the addresses of the machining cycle the coordinate valuesrefer to the coordinate system XG16YG16ZG16 of the free-definable plane G16.

Addresses X X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth)

Optional

addresses


The infeed takes place incrementally starting from the X coordinate of thestarting point of the machining cycle. The interpretation of the infeed K aseither a radius or a diameter depends on the current machine configuration.The MTS standard configuration uses in general the radius programming forall machining planes with driven tools.

D Decrease of infeed

In the address D it is possible to program a decrease of the infeed K permachining run. This means that the value of the infeed K per machining runin reduced by the value D. The interpretation of the value reduction of D aseither a radius or a diameter depends on the current machine configuration.The MTS standard configuration uses in general the radius programming forall machining planes with driven tools. The reduction of the infeed value Ktakes place at maximum up to the value equal to D (K=D).

If no decrease value has been programmed then D=0 is valid. The tool drillsin this case in each machining run up to the programmed depth X.

A Dwell time for chip breaking (value as rotations of the tool)

In the address A it is possible to program the dwell time for chip breaking.Having withdrawn to the clearance plane the tool carries out the programmednumber of rotations and then breaks the chip. After that the next infeed ismade.

B Dwell time for chip cleaning (value as rotations of the tool)

In the address B it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning.The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations at the bottom of thedrilled shaft and then removes the chips. Subsequently, the tool is withdrawnto the clearance level and the next infeed starts.

W The distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the

machining cycle (incremental, diameter value)

In the address W it is possible to program the distance in X between thewithdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate ofthe withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool inrapid travel movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle.Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeedvalue.

Thread Tapping Free-definable Plane: G62

© MTS GmbH 1998 265

13.7.3 Thread Tapping G62

Function With the machining cycle G62 it is possible to program a thread tapping cycle. Therotation direction of the thread tapping drill can be programmed for the infeed.When calling the machining cycle the infeed is then made with spindle rotationseither to the right or to the left, with the stored number of rotations and infeedspeed, and with the specified threading depth. After the cycle run the rotationdirection is automatically changed and the tool returns to the clearance plane inspecified infeed speed. If the withdrawal plane has been specified as well, then thetool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle therotation direction of the spindle is changed again and vice versa. In addition to G62it is necessary to program the multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on acircle). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machiningcycle is carried out.

NC command G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

Addresses X Threading depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses

M Rotation direction of the tool during infeed

When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is automatically changed.

W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining

cycle (incremental)

In the address W the distance in X between the withdrawal and clearanceplane of the machining cycle can be programmed. The X coordinate of thewithdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool inrapid speed movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle.Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeedvalue.

F Threading pitch

Free-definable Plane: G63 Reaming/Boring


13.7.4 Reaming/Boring G63

Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling hole. Prior tocalling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed tocorrespond to the applied reamer. When calling the cycle the infeed is made in thespecified rotation direction either to the right or to the left, with the specifiednumber of rotations and infeed speed up to the reaming depth as specified. Afterthat the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the toolreturns in the specified infeed speed to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal planehas been specified as well the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.At the end of the cycle the rotation direction is changed again. In addition to G63, itis necessary to program the multiple cycle as well, for instance G68 (cycle on aradius). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machiningcycle is carried out.

NC command G63 X... [W...]

Addresses X Depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses

W Distance between the clearance and withdrawal plane of the

machining cycle (incremental)

In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between thewithdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate ofthe withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the control first feeds in the tool inrapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then themachining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Square Pocket/Groove Free-definable Plane: G64

© MTS GmbH 1998 267

13.7.5 Square Pocket/Groove G64

Function With the command G64 it is possible to program a machining cycle for themachining of a square pocket or a groove. The cycle call point (pocket centerpoint) of the square pocket/groove is programmed in the corresponding multiplecycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point inrapid speed and starts then the machining of the square pocket/groove with thestored technology values. The travel paths of the tool for cycle processing can beinfluenced by the sign when programming the infeed K. After processing themachining cycle G64 the tool is positioned at the cycle call point again. If thewithdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns to thewithdrawal plane in rapid speed.

NC command G64 X... V... D... [K...] [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

Addresses X Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute)

V Dimension of the square pocket in Y

W Dimension of the square pocket in Z

Optional

addresses

K Infeed in X (incremental from cycle call onwards)

K+ On each infeed plane the square pocket is milled starting from thecenter of the square pocket.

K-... With a negative infeed value a groove is first milled to mark the outerline, then the rest the square pocket is milled in its full depth in onemachining run.

I Infeed in the YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter

If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid.An applicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting pathundercutting is 100%-I.

A Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove in the cycle call point with

reference to the negative ZG16 axis

Positive values for A rotate the square pocket/groove counterclockwise.Negative rotation angle values induce a clockwise rotation.

B Rounding radius of the corners of the square pocket

The programmed value of B has to be larger than or equal to the radius ofthe applied milling tool.


cycle (incremental, diameter value)


If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapidspeed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently, themachining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Free-definable Plane: G65 Circular Pocket


13.7.6 Circular Pocket G65

Function Using the command G65 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machiningof a circular pocket. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocketis programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at apoint). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machiningof the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. The tool travelpaths for cycle processing can be influenced by the programmed sign of the infeedK. After the machining cycle has been processed G65 the tool is positioned at thecycle call point again. If the withdrawal plane was programmed as well the toolthen returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.

NC command G65 X... B... K... [I...] [W...]

Addresses X Depth of the circular pocket (absolute)

B Radius of the circular pocket

K Infeed in X

K+... The tool moves in concentric circular paths when milling the pocket.

K-... The tool moves in spiral paths when milling the pocket.

Optional

Addresses

I Infeed in YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter

If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. Anapplicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercuttingis 100%-I.


cycle (incremental)

In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between thewithdrawal and the clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinateof the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made inrapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then themachining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Tapping Free-definable Plane: G66

© MTS GmbH 1998 269

13.7.7 Tapping G66

Function Using the command G66 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machiningof a tapping. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed in thecorresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes tothe cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the tapping with theprogrammed technology values. After processing the machining cycle G66 the toolreturns to the cycle call point again. If the withdrawal plane was programmed aswell, the tool returns to it in rapid speed.

NC command G66 X... D... B... K... [I...] [W...]


D Radius of the circular pocket

B Tapping radius

K Infeed in X

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in YG16 ZG16 plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter

If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. Areasonable range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is100%-I.


cycle (incremental)

In the address W it is possible to program the distance X between thewithdrawal and the clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinateof the withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made inrapid speed movement by the value W when calling the machining cycle.Then the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Free-definable Plane: G67 Cycle on a Circle


13.8 Multiple Cycles in the Free-definable Plane G16

13.8.1 Cycle on a Circle G67

Function Using the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle canbe repeated on a circle. Hereby the individual cycle runs are located equally farfrom each other on a circle. The coordinates of the circle center point can beprogrammed with the command G67. In other respects, the control uses thecurrent tool position as a circle center point for the multiple cycle G67.

NC command G67 R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y...]

Addresses R Radius of the circle

J Starting angle to the positive YG16 axis when the cycle is carried out for

the first time

H Angle increment between the individual cycle runs

E End angle to the positive Y axis when the cycle is carried out for the

last time

S Number of cycle runs on a circle

Optional

addresses

Z, Y Coordinates of the center of the circle

For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the currenttool position is used for the definition of the center of the circle .

Programming

hints

Beside R, three of the four addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.

Cycle on a Radius Free-definable Plane: G68

© MTS GmbH 1998 271

13.8.2 Cycle on a Radius G68

Function Using the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle canbe repeated several times on a radius. Hereby the individual cycle runs are alllocated at the same distance from each other on a radius. The coordinates of thestarting point of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. In otherrespects, the control uses the current tool position for the cycle call as a startingpoint of the radius for the multiple cycle G68.

NC command G68 J... H... E... S... R... [Z...] [Y...]

Addresses J Angle of the radius to the positive YG16 axis

H Y components of the distance of the cycle runs on the radius

The sign of H defines the direction of the radius in reference to the YG16 axis.

E Z components of the distance of the cycle runs on the radius

The sign of E defines the direction of the radius in reference to the ZG16 axis.

S Number of cycle runs

R Distance between two cycle runs on the radius

Optional

Addresses

Z, Y Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the first cycle call

point

For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the currenttool position is used for the definition of the center of the circle.

Programming

hints

Beside S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.

Free-definable Plane: G69 Cycle at a Point


13.8.3 Cycle at a Point G69

Function Using the command G69 the CNC control is instructed to run the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle only once at one point. The location of the point canbe specified by programming its coordinates in the current coordinate system. Ifthe command G69 is used to program a point, the control goes to this point withlinear interpolation in all axes in rapid speed. After that the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle is run.

NC command G69 [X...] [Z...] [Y...]

Optional

addresses

X, Z, Y Coordinates of the point on which the cycle is to be carried out

For coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used.

Programming

hints

If the processing of a machining cycle G60 is programmed with the commandG69, then only the coordinates X and Y will be interpreted. The coordinate Yresults from the face milling cycle G60.

For the machining cycles G61, G62, G63, G64, G65 and G66 all the threecoordinates X, Z and Y can be programmed.

Front Frace G17

© MTS GmbH 1998 273

13.9 Front Face G17

The selection of this plane allows the machining of the X, Y plane of the X, Y, Zcoordinate system. For the programming of this plane the Cartesian coordinates X,Y or the polar coordinates X, C can be used.

FOn plane G17, tool movements which have been programmed in Cartesiancoordinates X, Y are converted into movements of the X and C axis.

Location and

direction of the NC

axis X, Z, Y and C of

front face milling

G17

Programming front face machining inCartesian coordinates

Programming front face machining in polarcoordinates

Plane selection in NC program:

NC command G17

Programming

hints

When using the Cartesian coordinates X, Y the G commands G00, G01, G02,G03, G71, G72 and G73 can be applied as usual. The value of the coordinate X isthen programmed as a diameter value.

When programming in polar coordinates X, C the following has to be considered:the programming origin in polar coordinates is always located at X=0 and Y=0, i.e.exactly at the rotation center of the work part.The programmed coordinates are self-retaining. This means that if only one of thecoordinates is given in an NC command the missing coordinate retains the valuelast programmed for it.

Front Face: G10 Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates


13.9.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Polar Coordinates G10

Function The command G10 makes the tool to go on a straight line to the programmedtarget point in rapid speed. The target point of the movement is programmed inpolar coordinates.

NC command G10 X... C...

Addresses X The diameter of the target point of the path movement

The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of thecoordinate X is interpreted as a radius or as a diameter. The MTS standardconfigurations use in general radius programming for all machining planeswith driven tools.

C Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of coordinates (absolute)

Programming

hints

The NC command G10 is not self-retaining.

Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Front Face: G11

© MTS GmbH 1998 275

13.9.2 Linear Interpolation in Polar Coordinates G11

Function With the command G11 the tool goes to the programmed target point with infeedon a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed as polarcoordinates.

NC command G11 X... C...

Addresses X Diameter of the target point of the path movement

The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of thecoordinate X is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standardconfigurations use in general the radius programming for all machiningplanes with driven tool.

C Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of the coordinates

(absolute)

Programming

hints


Front Face: G12 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise


13.9.3 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Clockwise G12

Function With the command G12 the tool moves clockwise in infeed on an arc towards theprogrammed target point. The starting point of the travel movement is the currenttool position. The target point of the travel movement and the center point of thecircular arc are to be programmed.

NC command G12 X... C... I... J... [O...]

Addresses X Diameter of the target point of the path movement (absolute)

The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of thecoordinate X is interpreted as a radius or as a diameter. The MTS standardconfigurations use in general radius programming for all planes with driventools.

C Rotation angle of the target point in the coordinate origin (absolute)

I Diameter of the circle center (incremental from starting point)

J Rotation angle of the circle center in the coordinate origin (incremental

from starting point)

Optional

addresses

O Interpretation of the addresses I, J and C

O70 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center (I, J)

O71 C coordinate of the target point incremental to the starting point

FPlease note that the address O can be programmed twice within the NCcommand G12, and in each case with a different value.

Programming

hints


Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise Front Face: G13

© MTS GmbH 1998 277

13.9.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates CounterclockwiseG13

Function With the command G13 the tools moves counterclockwise by infeed on a circularpath to the programmed target point. The starting point of the travel movement isthe current tool position. The target point of the travel movement and the centerpoint of the circular path are to be programmed.

NC command G13 X... C... I... J... [O...]

Addresses X Diameter of the target point of the path movement (absolute)

The current machine configuration specifies whether the value of thecoordinate X is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. The MTS standardconfigurations use in general the radius programming for all machiningplanes with driven tools.

C Rotation angle of the target point in the origin of the coordinates

(absolute)

I Diameter of the circle center (incremental from starting point)

J Rotation angle of the circle center in the origin of the coordinates

(incremental from starting point)

Optional

addresses

O Interpretation of the addresses I, J and C

O70 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center (I, J)


FPlease note that the address O can be programmed twice within the NCcommand G12, and in each case with a different value.

Programming

hints


Front Face: G61 Drilling Cycle


13.10 Machining Cycles in the Front Face G17


Function With the machining cycle G61 a drilling process is programmed. Machining iscarried out as a single or multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted for chipbreaking and chip cleaning. After each infeed the tool is withdrawn to the outeredge of the drilling hole. After completion of the drilling hole the tool returns to thewithdrawal plane. In addition to G61 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed, forinstance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming the multiple cycle the mostrecently specified machining cycle is being carried out.

NC command G61 Z... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

Addresses Z Z coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the drilling (depth)

Optional

addresses

K Infeed in Z direction (incremental)

The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the Z coordinate of thestarting point of the machining cycle.

D Degression of cutting depth

In the address D it is possible to program the decrease of the infeed K permachining run. This means that the infeed K is reduced by the value D aftereach machining run. The infeed K can be reduced up to the value equal to D(K=D) at maximum.

If no infeed value reduction has been programmed, then D=0. In this casethe tool machines in one machining run up to the programmed depth Z.

A Dwell time for chip breaking (as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address A it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. Thetool makes the programmed number of rotations after withdrawal to theclearance plane for chip breaking. After that the next infeed is made.

B Dwell time for chip breaking (as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address B it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. Thetool carries out the programmed number of rotations in the drilled hole toclean it. After this the tool is first withdrawn to the clearance plane to thenperform the next infeed.

W Distance of the clearance plane of the machining cycle (incremental)

In the address W it is possible to program the distance Z between thewithdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The starting point ofthe cycle defines the Z coordinate of the withdrawal plane.


Thread Cutting Front Face: G62

© MTS GmbH 1998 279

13.10.2 Thread Cutting G62

Function With G62 it is possible to program a thread cutting cycle. The rotation direction ofthe tread tapping drill can be programmed for the infeed. When calling themachining cycle the infeed is then made with the programmed right or left rotationof the spindle, entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to theprogrammed threading depth. After that, the rotation direction of the spindle isautomatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane.If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returns in rapidspeed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of thespindle is changed again. In addition to G62 it is necessary to program a multiplecycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming of themultiple cycle the most recently defined machining cycle is carried out.

NC command G62 Z... [M...] [W...] [F...]

Addresses Z Threading depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses




cycle (incremental)


If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapidtravel movement by the value of W when calling the machining cycle.Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeedvalue.

F Threading pitch

Front Face: G63 Reaming/Boring



Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling hole. Prior tocalling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed inaccordance to the reamer applied. When calling the machining cycle the infeed ismade with the programmed right or left rotation of the spindle, entered number ofrotations and infeed speed up to the programmed depth. At the end of the cyclethe rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and the tool returns ininfeed speed back to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal plane has beenprogrammed as well the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the tool is changed again. Inaddition to G63 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed as well, for instance G68(cycle on a radius). By programming the multiple cycle the most recently specifiedmachining cycle is carried out.

NC command G63 Z... [W...]

Address Z Depth (absolute coordinates)

Optional

addresses




If the address W is programmed the control then feeds in the tool in rapidspeed by the value of W when calling the machining cycle. Subsequently,the machining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Square Pocket/Groove Front Face: G64

© MTS GmbH 1998 281


Function With the command G64 a machining cycle for machining a square pocket/groovecan be programmed. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the squarepocket/groove is programmed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instanceG69 (cycle at a point).The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and startsthe machining of the square pocket/groove with the programmed technologyvalues. The travel paths of the tool can be influenced by the sign of the infeedvalue K when programming it. After processing the machining cycle G64 the tool isrepositioned to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmedas well, the tool then returns to the withdrawal plane in rapid speed.

NC command G64 Z... V... D... K... [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]

Addresses Z Depth of the square pocket/groove (absolute)

V Dimension of the square pocket in X

D Dimension of the square pocket in Y

Optional

addresses

K Infeed in Z (incremental starting from the cycle call)

K+ On each infeed plane the square pocket is milled starting from thecenter point of the pocket.

K-... With a negative infeed value a groove marking the outline of thepocket is milled first and then the square pocket in its full depth in onemachining run.

I Infeed in X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter

If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. Anapplicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is100%-I.


reference to the positive X axis


The programmed value of B has to be larger than or equal to the radius ofthe milling tool applied.


cycle (incremental)


If the address W has been programmed the control then feeds in the tool inrapid speed by the value of W when calling the machining cycle.Subsequently, the machining is carried out with the programmed infeedvalue.

Front Face: G65 Circular Pocket



Function The machining of a circular pocket can be programmed with the command G65.The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocket is programmed inthe corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69. The tool goes to the cycle callpoint in rapid speed and starts the machining of the circular pocket with theprogrammed technology values. For the processing of the cycle the travel path canbe influenced by the sign of the infeed K when programming it. After processingthe cycle G65 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal point hasbeen programmed as well the tool then returns to the withdrawal point in rapidspeed.

NC command G65 Z... B... K... [I...] [W...]

Addresses Z Depth of the circular pocket (absolute)


K Infeed in Z

K+... The tool moves in concentric circles when milling circularpockets.

K-... The tool moves in spiral circles when milling circular pockets.

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in the X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter



cycle (incremental)



Tapping Front Face: G66

© MTS GmbH 1998 283

13.10.6 Tapping G66

Function The machining of a tapping can be programmed as a machining cycle with thecommand G66. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed in thecorresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes tothe cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machining of the tapping with theprogrammed technology values. Having processed the machining cycle G66 thetool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed aswell, the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.

NC command G66 Z... D... B... W... K... [I...] [W...]

Addresses Z Depth of the circular pocket (absolute)


B Tapping radius

K Infeed in Z

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in the X, Y plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter



cycle (incremental)


If the address W has been programmed the first infeed of the tool is made inrapid speed by the value W when calling the machining cycle. Then themachining is carried out with the programmed infeed value.

Front Face: G67 Cycle on a Circle


13.11 Multiple Cycles in the Front Face G17


Function With the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle canbe run several times on a circle. Hereby the individual cycle runs all have the samedistance from each other on this circle. The coordinates of the circle center pointcan be programmed with the command G67. Otherwise, the control uses thecurrent tool position at the time of the cycle call as the circle center point for themultiple cycle G67.

NC command G67 R... J... H... E... S... [X...] [Y.../C...]


J Starting angle to the positive X axis when running the cycle on the

circle for the first time

H Angle increment between the individual runs of the cycle

E End angle to the positive X axis applied for the final run of the cycle on

the circle

S Number of the cycle runs on a circle

Optional

addresses

X, Y/C Coordinates of the circle center point

The circle center point can be programmed either in Cartesian (X, Y) orpolar coordinates (X, C).

When processing the cycle a Y coordinate programmed in Cartesiancoordinates is converted into the corresponding rotation of the rotationaxis C.

For coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used for the definition of the circlecenter point.

Programming

hints


Cycle on a Radius Front Face: G68

© MTS GmbH 1998 285


Function The most recently programmed machining cycle can be run several times on aradius with the multiple cycle G68. The individual cycle runs are located at aconstant distance from each other on the radius. The coordinates of the startingpoint of the radius can be programmed with the command G68. Otherwise, thecontrol takes the current tool position at the time of the cycle call as the startingpoint of the radius for the multiple cycle G68.

NC command G68 J... H... E... S... R...[X...] [Y.../C...]

Addresses J Angle between straight lines and the positive X axis

H X components of the pitch of the individual cycle calls on the radius

E Y components of the pitch of the individual cycle calls on the radius

If the coordinate Y is used to program the starting point of the straight linesthe value of the address E is also interpreted as the value of Y.

If, on the other hand, C is used to program the starting point, then E indicatesthe rotation angle of the C axis.

S Number of cycle runs

R Distance between two cycle runs (pitch) on the radius

Optional

addresses

X,Y/C Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and of the 1st cycle

call point.

The starting point can be programmed either in Cartesian(X, Y) or in polar coordinates (X, C).

When processing a cycle, a Y coordinate which has been programmed inCartesian coordinates is converted into a corresponding rotation of therotation axis in C.

For coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used for the definition of the startingpoint.

Programming

hints

Beside S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.

Front Face: G69 Cycle at a Point



Function The command G69 instructs the CNC control to run the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle only once at one point. The location of this point canbe specified by programming the coordinates in the current coordinate system. If apoint has been programmed with the command G69, the control goes in all axes tothis point with linear interpolation in rapid speed. Subsequently, the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle is run.

NC command G69 [X...] [Y.../C...]

Optional

addresses

X, Y/C Coordinates of the point at which the cycle is to be run

For coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the tool position is used.

Shell Surface G18

© MTS GmbH 1998 287

13.12 Shell Surface - G18

By selecting this plane it is possible to machine on the plane Y, Z. The infeed ismade in X.

To program on this plane either the Cartesian coordinates Y, Z of the rolled outshell surface of the diameter X or the cylindrical coordinates Z, C can be used.

FOn the plane G18 machining processes programmed in Cartesian coordinates Y,Z are being transformed into movements of the Z and C axis. The Y axis of themachine is not used here. During machining the tool is always positioned in therotation center (Y=0).

Rolling out a shell

surface

Cartesian

coordinates of a

point on a shell

surface G18

Location of a point

on a shell surface

G18 in cylinder

coordinates

G18 Shell Surface


Selection alternative 1 for a shell surface in an NC program:

NC command G18 X...

Address X Cylinder diameter (reference diameter for rolling out the shell surface)

Selection alternative 2 for a shell surface in an NC program:

NC command G18 B...

Address B Cylinder radius (reference radius for rolling out the shell surface)

Programming

hints

When using the Cartesian coordinates Y, Z the G commands G00, G01, G02,G03, G71, G72 and G73 can be used as usual.

FPlease, consider the following hints regarding the G commands whenprogramming the cylinder coordinates Z, C.

Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates Shell Surface: G10

© MTS GmbH 1998 289

13.12.1 Rapid Speed Movement in Cylinder Coordinates G10

Function With the command G10 the tool moves in rapid speed to the programmed targetpoint on a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed in polarcoordinates.

NC command G10 Z... C...

Addresses Z Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path

C Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path (absolute)

Programming

hints


Shell Surface: G11 Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates


13.12.2 Interpolation of Straight Lines in Cylinder Coordinates G11

Function With the command G11 the tool moves in infeed to the programmed target pointon a straight line. The target point of the movement is programmed in polarcoordinates.

NC command G11 Z... C...

Addresses Z Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path

C Rotation angle of the target point of the travel path

Programming

hints


Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise Shell Surface: G12

© MTS GmbH 1998 291

13.12.3 Circle Interpolation in Cylinder Coordinates Clockwise G12

Function With the command G12 the tool moves clockwise in infeed to a programmedtarget point on a circular path. The starting point of the infeed is the current toolposition. The target point of the travel path and the center point of the circular pathare to be programmed.

NC command G12 Z... C... K... J... [O...]

Addresses Z Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path (absolute)


K Z coordinate of the circle center point (incremental from starting point)

J Rotation angle of the circle center point in the coordinate origin


Optional

addresses

O Control address for the interpretation of the addresses K, J and C

O70 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center point (K, J)

O71 C coordinate of the target point incremental with reference to thestarting point

FPlease, note that the address O within the NC command G12 can beprogrammed twice, and in each case with different values.

Programming

hints


Shell Surface: G13 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates Counterclockwise


13.12.4 Circle Interpolation in Polar Coordinates CounterclockwiseG13

Function With the command G13 the tool moves counterclockwise as infeed to theprogrammed target point on a circular path. The starting point of the travelmovement is the current tool position. The target point of the travel movement andthe center point of the circular path need to be programmed.

NC command G13 Z... C... K... J... [O...]

Addresses Z Z coordinate of the target point of the travel path (absolute)


K Z coordinate of the target center point (incremental from starting point)

J Rotation angle of the circle center point in the coordinate origin


Optional

addresses

O Control address for the interpolation of the addresses K, J and C

O70 Polar coordinates (absolute) of the circle center point (K, J)


FPlease, note that the address O within the NC command G12 can beprogrammed twice, and in each case with different values.

Programming hints The NC command G13 is not self-retaining.

Drilling cycle Shell Surface: G61

© MTS GmbH 1998 293

13.13 Machining Cycles in the Shell Surface G18

13.13.1 Drilling cycle G61

Function With the machining cycle G61 the machining of a drilling can be programmed. Themachining takes place either as a single infeed or a multiple infeed. The infeedcan be interrupted, if desired, for chip breaking and for chip cleaning. After eachinfeed the tool returns to the outer edge of the drilling hole. After completion of thedrilling the tool returns to the withdrawal plane. In addition to G61 it is necessary toprogram a multiple cycle as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). Byprogramming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is run.

NC command G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W... ]


Optional

addresses


The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the Y, X coordinate ofthe starting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configurationspecifies whether the infeed value K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter.The MTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for allplanes with driven tools.

D Degression of cutting depth

In the address D it is possible to program the decrease per machining run ofthe infeed K. This means that K is reduced by the value D per eachmachining run. The current machine configuration specifies whether thevalue of the decrease D is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. MTSstandard configurations use in general radius programming for all planes withdriven tools. The decrease of the infeed K is carried out at maximum until itsvalue is identical with the value D (K=D).

If no decrease has been programmed, then D=0. The tool then drills up tothe programmed depth X in one machining run.

A Dwell time for chip breaking (entry as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address A it is possible to program the dwell time for chip breaking.The tool makes the programmed number of rotations after the withdrawal tothe clearance plane in order to break the chip. After this the next infeed iscarried out.

B Dwell time for chip cleaning (entry as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address V it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning.The tool makes the programmed number of rotations at the drilling base inorder to clean the drilling hole from chips. After that the tool is withdrawn tothe clearance plane and the next infeed is carried out.

W Distance between the clearance plane and withdrawal plane of the


In the address W it is possible to program the distance between thewithdrawal and clearance plane of the machining cycle. The X coordinate ofthe withdrawal plane is defined by the starting point of the cycle.

If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the toolis first W in rapid speed movement when calling the machining cycle. Afterthat machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.

Shell Surface: G62 Thread Cutting



Function With the machining cycle G62 a thread cutting cycle can be programmed. Therotation direction of the thread cutting tool for the infeed can be programmed.When calling the machining cycle the infeed is made either with right or leftrotation of the spindle, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to theprogrammed threading depth. At the end, the rotation direction of the spindle isautomatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane.If withdrawal plane has been programmed then the tool returns to the withdrawalplane in rapid speed. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle ischanged. In addition to G62 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed, for instanceG67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming of the multiple cycle the mostrecently specified machining cycle is run.

NC command G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

Addresses X Threading depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses




cycle (incremental)



F Threading pitch

Reaming/Boring Shell Surface: G63

© MTS GmbH 1998 295


Function The command G63 specifies a machining cycle for reaming a drilling. Prior to thecall of G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to be programmed inaccordance to the reamer applied. When calling the machining cycle the infeed ismade either with right or left rotation of the tool, the entered number of rotationsand infeed speed up to the programmed depth of the drilling. At the end, therotation direction of the tool is automatically changed and the tool returns to theclearance plane in infeed speed. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed thetool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle therotation direction of the spindle is changed again. In addition to G63 a multiplecycle needs to be programmed, for instance G68 (cycle on a radius). Byprogramming the multiple cycle the most recently specified machining cycle is run.


Address X Depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses





Shell Surface: G64 Square Pocket/Groove



Function With the command G64 the machining cycle is programmed for the machining of asquare pocket/groove. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the squarepocket/groove is programmed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instanceG69 (cycle at a point). The tool moves to the cycle call point in rapid speed andstarts the machining of the square pocket/groove with the programmed technologyvalues. The travel paths of the tool for the processing of the cycle can beinfluenced by the sign of the infeed value K when programming it. Havingprocessed the machining cycle G64 the tool returns to the cycle call point. Ifwithdrawal plane has been programmed as well the tool then returns to thewithdrawal plane in rapid speed.

NC command G64 X... V... D... K... [I...] [A...] B...] [W...]



If the corresponding multiple cycle uses the coordinates Z and C, then V isinterpreted as a constant dimension specified.

D Dimension of the square pocket in Z

K Infeed in X (incremental starting from cycle call point)

K+ On each infeed plane the square pocket is machined starting from thecenter of the pocket hole.

K-... If the infeed sign is negative the groove marking the final outline of thepocket is milled first and then in one machining run the square pocketin its full depth.

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter



reference to the positive Y axis


The programmed value of B has to be larger than or identical with the radiusof the applied milling tool.


cycle (incremental)


If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the toolis first W in rapid travel movement when calling the machining cycle. Afterthat machining is carried out with the programmed infeed.

Circular Pocket Shell Surface: G65

© MTS GmbH 1998 297


Function With the command G65 the machining cycle for machining a circular pocket isprogrammed. The cycle call point (pocket center point) of the circular pocket isprogrammed with the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at apoint). The tool moves in rapid speed to the cycle call point and starts themachining of the circular pocket with the programmed technology values. Thetravel paths for the processing of the cycle can be influence by the sign of theinfeed value K when programming it. After completing the processing of themachining cycle G65 the tool returns to the cycle call point. If withdrawal plane hasbeen programmed as well the tool then returns in rapid speed to the withdrawalplane.




K Infeed in X

K+... The tool machines in concentric travel paths

K-... The tool machines in spiral travel paths

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter





If the address W has been programmed the control infeed value for the toolis first W in rapid speed when calling the machining cycle. After thatmachining is carried out with the programmed infeed.

Shell Surface: G66 Tapping


13.13.6 Tapping G66

Function With the command G66 the machining cycle for tapping is programmed. The cyclecall point (tapping center point ) is programmed with the corresponding multiplecycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes to the cycle call point inrapid speed and starts machining the tapping with the programmed technologyvalues. After processing the machining cycle G66 the tool returns to the cycle callpoint. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool returns inrapid speed to the withdrawal plane.




B Tapping radius

K Infeed in X

Optional

addresses

I Infeed in Y, Z plane in percentage of the diameter of the milling tool






Cycle on a Circle Shell Surface: G67

© MTS GmbH 1998 299

13.14 Multiple Cycles in the Shell Surface G18


Function With the multiple cycle G67 it is possible to repeat several times the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle on a circle. The pitch between the individualmachining runs on the circle remains constant. The coordinates of the circle centerpoint can be programmed with the command G67. If the coordinates of the circlecenter point have not been programmed, the control uses the current tool positionfor the cycle call as a circle center point for the multiple cycle G67.

NC command G67 R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y.../C...]




H Angle element between cycle runs

E End angle to the positive Y axis when running the cycle on the circle

for the last time

S Number of cycle runs on the circle

Optional

addresses

Z, Y/C Coordinates of the circle center point

The circle center point can be programmed in the Cartesian coordinates(Z, Y) as well as in polar coordinates (Z, C) (Z, C).

When processing the cycle a Y coordinate programmed as a Cartesiancoordinate is converted into the rotation of the corresponding rotationaxis.

For the coordinates which have not been programmed the current toolposition is used for the definition of the position of the circle center point.

Programming

hints

Beside R, three of the following addresses J, H, E, S have to be programmed.

Shell Surface: G68 Cycle on a Radius



Function With the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle on aradius can be run several times. The machining pitch between the cycle runs onthe radius remains constant. The coordinates of the origin of the radius can beprogrammed with the command G68. If the origin has not been programmed, thecontrol takes the current tool position as the starting point of the radius for themultiple cycle G68 when calling the cycle.

NC command G68 J... H... E... S... R... [Z...] [Y.../C...]

Addresses S Number of cycle runs

J Angle of the straight lines to the positive Y axis

H Distance of the cycle runs as a Y value or as rotation angle of the C

axis

If the coordinate Y is used for the programming of the starting point then thevalue of the address H is also interpreted as a Y value.

On the other hand, if the coordinate C is used for the programming of thestarting point then H indicates the rotation angle of the C axis.

E Distance between the cycle runs in Z

The sign of the value E defines the direction of the radius in relation to theZ axis.

R Distance between two cycle runs on the radius

Optional

addresses

Z, Y/C Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the 1st cycle call

point

The starting point can be programmed in Cartesian coordinates (Z, Y)and also in polar coordinates (Z, C).

When processing the cycle, the Y coordinate programmed in theCartesian system is converted into the corresponding rotation of therotation axis C.

For the coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used for the definition of the startingpoint.

Programming

hints

Beside S, two of the following four addresses J, H, E or R need to be programmed.

Cycle at a Point Shell Surface: G69

© MTS GmbH 1998 301


Function The command G69 makes the CNC control to run the most recently programmedmachining cycle only once at a point. The location of the point can be specified byprogramming the coordinates in the current coordinate system. If a point isprogrammed with the command G69, then the control goes in rapid speed to thispoint with linear interpolation in all axes. Subsequently, the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle is run.

NC command G69 [Z...] [Y.../C...]

Optional

addresses

Z, Y/C Coordinate of the point to which the cycle is to be run

For the coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used.

G19 Chord Surface


13.15 Chord Surface G19

Chord surfaces are used to program milling with vertically applied driven tools. Themilling tools are installed vertically when machining the selected chord surface invertical direction to the Y, Z plane of the coordinate system of the turning planeG14.

Therefore, a chord surface can be seen as a special case of the free-definableplane G16, whereby the rotation angle is A=0 and no new coordinate system isentered for this plane.

Using chord surface does not necessarily require the availability of the B axis on theCNC machine. However, for eccentric machining an additional Y axis is required.

The coordinate system of the turning plane G14 is valid also for machining on achord surface G19. When programming the Cartesian plane coordinates Y and Zare used. The infeed is made in direction of the negative X axis.

Location and

direction of the NC

axes X, Z, Y and C

in the plane G19

chord surface

The coordinates of

a point on the plane

G19 chord surface

Chord Surface G19

© MTS GmbH 1998 303

Selecting chord surface in an NC program:

NC command G19 C...

Address C Rotation angle of the rotation axis where the work part is positioned

when selecting the plane (fixed)

When switching on the CNC machine the controllable NC axes are referenced. Thereference point for the rotation angle 0° of the rotation axis C are located on thepositive X axis of the machine coordinate system. When clamping the raw part thelocation of the value C=0° is specified in relation to the work part. Subsequently, it ispossible to make the exact positioning of the work part for machining with driventools by programming the address C.

Chord Surface: G60 Plane Milling Cycle


13.16 Machining Cycles in the Chord Surface G19

13.16.1 Plane Milling Cycle G60

Function With the machining cycle G60 the plane milling is programmed. A plane is asurface parallel to the Y, Z plane whose location can be freely selected in X. Thecycle machines the programmed plane surface either in a single or in multipleinfeed. The travel paths of the milling tool can be optimized if desired. In addition toG60 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point).By programming a multiple cycle the machining cycle most recently programmedis run.

NC command G60 W... X... V... K... [I...] [O...] [O...]

FFWhen programming the addresses of the machining cycle the coordinate datarefers in the following to the coordinate system X, Y, Z of the turning plane G14.The cycle requires the availability of a Y axis on a CNC machine.

Addresses W Z coordinate of the end point of the plane surface

The starting point of the plane surface is defined by the Z coordinate of themultiple cycle programmed after it. If Z is not programmed in the multiplecycle the value of the current tool position is used when calling a cycle.

X X coordinate (absolute) of the end point of the face surface

Unlike a CNC milling machine the coordinate entry for the infeed isprogrammed with an absolute value in this cycle.

V Half of the machining width in Y for the machining of the plane surface

The machining of the plane surface in Y direction from the Y coordinate withthe value -V, to the Y coordinate with the value +V.


The infeed is made incrementally starting from the X coordinate of thestarting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configurationdefines whether the infeed K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. TheMTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for allplanes with driven tools.

If the absolute value of the remaining infeed is between 2K and K, then thecontrol makes the infeed twice. In each case half of the remaining infeedvalue is uses for the infeed.

Optional addresses I Infeed in Z direction (infeed value as percentage of the milling tool

diameter)

The infeed in Z direction depends on the tool used for the cycle. If Ihas not been programmed the control automatically uses for infeed a valuewhich is 75% of the width (diameter) of the current milling tool. Values whichare larger than or equal to 100% cannot be applied for I.

The sign of the address I defines whether synchron or conven-tional millingis used:

I+ = synchron milling (standard)

I- = conventional milling

Plane Milling Cycle Chord Surface: G60

© MTS GmbH 1998 305

O Absolute or incremental Z coordinate of the end point W of the plane

surface

O70 Z coordinate of the end point W absolute (standard)

O71 Z coordinate of the end point W incremental

O Optimizing the travel paths when processing a cycle

O10 machining without optimizing function (standard)

O11 optimized machining in Y direction

If O11 has been programmed the tool moves in Y only from -Ymin to +Ymin,whereby Ymin is the smallest value calculated for the current infeed togenerate the programmed plane surface. Programming the address V is inthis case irrelevant.

Chord Surface: G61 Drilling Cycle



Function With the machining cycle G61 a drilling process is programmed. The machining iscarried out as a single or multiple infeed. The infeed can be interrupted for chipbreaking and chip cleaning if necessary. After each infeed the tool returns to theouter edge of the drilling hole. After completion of the drilling the tool returns to thewithdrawal plane. In addition to G61 it is necessary to program a multiple cycle aswell, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). By programming a multiple cycle themachining cycle most recently programmed is run.

NC command G61 X... [K...] [D...] [A...] [B...] [W...]


Optional

addresses


The infeed is carried out incrementally starting from the X coordinate of thestarting point of the machining cycle. The current machine configurationspecifies whether the infeed K is interpreted as a radius or a diameter. TheMTS standard configurations use in general radius programming for allplanes with driven tools .

D Decrease of the infeed (diameter)

In the address D it is possible to program the value the infeed is decreasedper each machining run. This means that the infeed value K is reduced bythe value D per each machining run. The current machine configurationspecifies the interpretation of the reduction value D either as a radius or adiameter. The MTS standard configurations use in general radiusprogramming for all planes with driven tools. The infeed K is maximallyreduced up to the value equal to D (K=D).

If this decrease value has not been programmed then D=0 is valid. The toolthen drills in one machining run up to the programming depth X.

A Dwell time for chip breaking (given as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address A it is possible to program a dwell time for chip breaking. Thetool carries out the programmed number of rotations after withdrawal to theclearance plane in order to break the chip. After this the next infeed is made.

B Dwell time for chip cleaning (given as number of rotations of the tool)

In the address B it is possible to program the dwell time for chip cleaning.The tool carries out the programmed number of rotations at the bottom of thedrilling hole, in order to clean the drilling hole from the chips. After that thetool is withdrawn to the clearance plane and the next infeed is made.

W Distance between clearance and withdrawal plane of the machining

cycle (incremental)



Thread Cutting Chord Surface: G62

© MTS GmbH 1998 307


Function With the machining cycle G62 it is possible to program a thread cutting cycle. Therotation direction of the thread cutter for the infeed can be programmed. Whencalling the machining cycle the infeed is made either with a right or left rotation ofthe spindle, the entered number of rotations and infeed speed up to theprogrammed threading depth. Subsequently, the rotation direction of the spindle isautomatically changed and the tool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane.If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, then the tool returns in rapidspeed to the withdrawal plane. At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of thespindle is changed again. In addition to G62 a multiple cycle needs to beprogrammed as well, for instance G67 (cycle on a circle). With the programming ofthe multiple cycle the most recently programmed machining cycle is run.

NC command G62 X... [M...] [W...] [F...]

Address X Threading depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses


When withdrawing the tool the rotation direction is changed automatically.


cycle (incremental diameter value)



F Threading pitch

Chord Surface: G63 Reaming/Boring



Function With the command G63 it is possible to program a machining cycle forreaming/boring. Prior to calling G63 the rotation direction of the spindle has to beprogrammed in accordance to the reamer applied. When calling the cycle theinfeed is made with either a right or left rotation of the spindle, the entered numberof rotations and infeed speed up to the programmed depth of the drilling.Subsequently, the rotation direction of the spindle is automatically changed and thetool returns in infeed speed to the clearance plane. If the withdrawal plane hasbeen programmed as well the tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.At the end of the cycle the rotation direction of the spindle is changed again. Inaddition to G63 a multiple cycle needs to be programmed as well, for instance G68(cycle on a radius). With the programming of the multiple cycle the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle is run.


Address X Depth (absolute)

Optional

addresses





Square Pocket/Groove Chord Surface: G64

© MTS GmbH 1998 309


Function With the command G64 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machiningof a square pocket or a groove. The cycle call point (pocket center point) isprogrammed in the corresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at apoint). The tool goes to the cycle call point in rapid speed and starts the machiningof the square pocket/groove with the programmed technology data. The travelpaths of the tool for processing the cycle can be influenced by the sign of theinfeed value K when programming it. After processing the machining cycle G64 thetool returns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmedthe tool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.

NC command G64 X... V... D... [K...] [I...] [A...] [B...] [W...]



D Dimension of the square pocket in Z

Optional

addresses

K Infeed in X (incremental starting from the cycle call point)

K+ On each infeed plane the square pocket is machined starting fromthe center.

K-... If the infeed value has a negative sign a groove marking the finalouter line of the square pocket is milled first and after that the squarepocket is machined in one machining run in its full depth.

I Infeed in the Y, Z plane in percentage of the milling tool diameter

If I has not been programmed the standard value I=75% is valid. Anapplicable value range for I is 10%<I<85%. The resulting path undercutting is100%-I.

A Rotation angle of the square pocket/groove with reference to the

negative Z axis

Positive values for A rotate the square pocket/groove counter-clockwise.Negative values for A rotate the square pocket/groove clockwise.


The programmed value of B has to be larger than or identical with radius ofthe milling tool applied.


cycle (incremental diameter value)



Chord Surface: G65 Circular Pocket



Function With the command G65 a machining cycle can be programmed for the machiningof a circular pocket. The cycle call point (pocket center point) is programmed in thecorresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes tothe cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the circular pocket with theprogrammed technology values. The travel paths of the tool for the processing ofthe machining cycle can be influenced by the sign of the infeed value K whenprogramming it. After processing the machining cycle the tool returns to the cyclecall point. If withdrawal plane has been programmed as well, the tool then returnsin rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.




K Infeed in X

K+... The tool moves in concentric paths when machining

K-... The tool moves in spiral paths when machining

Optional

addresses




cycle (incremental)



Tapping Chord Surface: G66

© MTS GmbH 1998 311

13.16.7 Tapping G66

Function With the command G66 it is possible to program a machining cycle for machininga tapping. The cycle call point (tapping center point) is programmed with thecorresponding multiple cycle, for instance G69 (cycle at a point). The tool goes tothe cycle call point in rapid speed and starts machining the tapping with theprogrammed technology values. After processing the machining cycle G66 the toolreturns to the cycle call point. If the withdrawal plane has been programmed, thetool returns in rapid speed to the withdrawal plane.




B Tapping radius

K Infeed in X

Optional

addresses




cycle (incremental)



Chord Surface: G67 Cycle on a Circle


13.17 Multiple Cycles in the Chord Face


Function With the multiple cycle G67 the most recently programmed machining cycle canbe run several times on a circle. The cycle machining pitch between the individualruns remains constant on the circle. The coordinates of the circle center point canbe programmed with the command G67. In other case, the current tool position istaken as the circle center point for the multiple cycle G67 when calling the cycle.

NC command G67 R... J... H... E... S... [Z...] [Y...]




H Angle increment between the cycle runs

E End angle to the positive Y axis when running the cycle on the circle

for the last time

S Number of cycle runs on a circle

Optional

addresses

Z, Y Coordinates of the circle center point

For coordinates which have not been programmed the corresponding valueof the current tool position is used.

Programming

hints


Cycle on a Radius Chord Surface: G68

© MTS GmbH 1998 313


Function With the multiple cycle G68 the most recently programmed machining cycle canbe run several times on a radius. The cycle machining pitch between the individualruns remains constant on the radius. The coordinates of the starting point of theradius can be programmed with the command G68. Otherwise, the current toolposition is taken as the starting point of the radius for the multiple cycle G68 whencalling the cycle.

NC command G68 S... J... H... E... R... [Z...] [Y...]

Addresses S Number of cycle runs

J Angle of the radius to the positive Y axis

H Distance of the cycle runs in Y

The sign of H defines the direction of the radius with reference to the Y axis.

E Distance of the circle runs in Z

The sign of E defines the direction of the radius with reference to the Z axis.

R Distance between two cycle runs

Optional

addresses

Z, Y Coordinates of the starting point of the radius and the 1st cycle call

point

For coordinates which have not been programmed the value of the currenttool position is used.

Programming

hints

Besides S, two of the four addresses J, H, E or R have to be programmed.

Chord Surface: G69 Cycle at a Point



Function With the command G69 the CNC control is instructed to run the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle only once at a point. The location of the point isdefined by programming its coordinates in the current coordinate system. If thepoint is programmed with the command G69, then the control goes in rapid speedto this point with linear interpolation in all axes. Subsequently, the most recentlyprogrammed machining cycle is run.

NC command G69 [X...][Z...] [Y...]

Optional

addresses

X, Z, Y Coordinates of the point the cycle is to be run at

For coordinates which have not been programmed the correspondingvalue of the current tool position is used.

Appendix: Table of Programmable Addresses

© MTS GmbH 1998 315

Appendix 1: Table of Programmable Addresses

All measurements are in millimeters (mm), unless otherwise stated.

Address Value / Range Explanation / Function

% 000001 to999999 Identification of a Main Program

A 000 to 360

000.000 to 999.999

- Input of angles in degrees: G71 cycle

- Thread angle in degrees: Threading cycle G31

- Dwell time (in seconds) after tool retreat for chip-breaking: Deep-drilling cycle G84

- Length of the line in X (absolute); for calculation ofthe taper rise: Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89

B 000.000 to 999.999 - Radius: Contour strings G72, G73

- Rounding radius: Recessing cycle G86

- Additional swivel rotation axis for the turret(depending on machine configuration and of thecurrent machining plane)

Exception: During contour programming ofG72/G73 B remains circle radius.

C 000.000 to 999.999 - Positionable turning axis

D 000.000 to 999.999

- 999.999 to +999.999

- Depth of feed: Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89,G75 and G76

- Degression: Deep drilling cycle G84

- Finishing allowance: Clearance cutting cycles G78and G85

- Width of recess: Recessing cycle G79

E 000.000 to 360.000

- 360.000 to + 360.000

- Thread angle to the Z-axis, at the end point:Threading cycle G31

- Taper rise : Straight/Plane Roughing cycle G89

- Angle of the oriented tangent to the positive Z-axis,at the end point: Contour strings G72/G73

F 000.001 to 050.000 - Feedrate in mm/rev

- Lead: Threading cycles G31 and G33

G 00 to 99 - Motion (G-) commands

H 000.000 to 999.999 - Distance after which the feed motion is interruptedfor chip-breaking: Straight/Plane Roughing cycleG89, G75 and G76

- Radius of roundings at the upper edge of therecess: recessing cycle G79

I - 999.999 to +999.999 - Centre coordinate in X: commands G02 and G03,and contour strings G72 and G73

- Difference of radii between the theoretical startingpoint and the end point of the thread: Threadingcycle G31




I - 999.999 to + 999.999

000.000 to 999.999

- Infeed in X: Cross- and straight roughing cyclesG75, G76, G81 and G89 as well as contouringcontour parallel cross roughing cycle G83

- Grinding allowance: Clearance cutting cycles G78and G85 compliant with DIN 509 Type E and F

- Depth of clearance cut: Thread cutting cycles G78and G85 compliant with DIN 76

- Allowance in X: Recessing cycles G79 and G86

- Rounding radius: Cycle G7

- Chamfer length: Cycle G88

J - 999.999 to + 999.999

000.000 to 999.999

- Feed adjustment per cut in X: Threading cycle G31

- Clearing distance between tool and part: Recessingcycle G79

K - 999.999 to +999.999

000.000 to 999.999

- Centre coordinate in Z: Cycles G02 and G03contour strings G72 and G73

- Feed adjustment per cut in Z: Threading cycle G31

- Feed adjustment per cut in Z: Straight and crossroughing cycles G75, G76, G82 and G89,Contouring cycle G83

- Length of clearance cut: Threading cycles G78 andG85 compliant with DIN 76

- Allowance in Z: Recessing cycle G79

- Width of Recess: Recessing cycle G86

- First drilling level: Deep drilling cycle G84

L 0 to 100

01 0r 02

000.000 to 999.999

- Optimization of remaining cuts: Roughing cyclesG75, G76, G81, G82 and G89

- DIN-Parameters : Clearance cutting cycle G78compliant with DIN 509 Type E and F

- Length of line : Contour string G71

M 00 to 99 - M functions

N 001 to 999 - Number of NC block

O 000 to 999

000 to 450

O001, O002

- Number of first block: Subprogram invocation G22

- Nmber of first block: Routines G23

- Block number : Jump instruction G24

- Side angle to the side of the programmed endpoint: Recessing cycle G79 (tenths of degrees)

- Selection of alternatives: Contour strings

- Finishing allowance in Z: G57 command

O O011, O012

O070

- Selection of alternatives: Roundings with R+ in thecourse of contour strings

- Absolute coordinates of circle centres: Contourstrings G72 and G73


© MTS GmbH 1998 317


O 101, 102, 204, 206,306, 410, 210, 316,425, 540

- Definition of dimensions: Clearance cutting cycleG78 compliant with DIN 509, Type E and F

P 00 to 99 - Addresses for parameter value assignation

Q 000 to 999

000 to 450

- Number of last block: Subprogram invocation G22

- Number of last block: Program part repetition G23

- Final cut segmentation: Threading cycle G31

- Side angle in tenth of degrees (to the side of theprogrammed corner point): Recessing cycle G79

R - 999.999 to +999.999

000.000 to 999.999

- Chamfer (R-) or rounding (R+): Contour stringsG71, G72 and G73

- Chamfer at the bottom edge: Recess. cycle G79

- Degression of feeding depth: roughing cycles G75,G76, G81, G82 and G89

S 001 to 999

0001 to 9999

- Number of cutting passes: Threading cycle G31

- Number of cutting passes: Roughing cycles G75,G76 and G89

- Number of repetitions: Subprogram invocation G22and program part repetition G23

- Spindle speed in RPM

- Constant spindle speed in m/min

T 0101 to 1699 - The first two digits (01 - 16) denote the turretposition for tool change

- The last two digits (01 - 99) denote thecompensation value storage

U 000000 to 999999 - Subprogram name: G22

V 000.000 to 999.999 - Minimum depth of cut: Roughing cycles G75, G76,G81, G82 and G89

W 000.000 to 999.999 - Distance by which the tool moves back for chip-breaking: Roughing cycles G75, G76, G81, G82and G89

- Radius of rounding at the bottom edge of recess:Recessing cycle G79

X - 999.999 to + 999.999

000.000 to 999.999

- Coordinate value in X

- Coordinate value in X: G57 command

- Dwell in sec: G04 command

Y - 999.999 to + 999.999 - Additional feed axis for the turret

Z - 999.999 to + 999.999 - Coordinate value in Z

- Finishing allowance in Z: G57 command



Index

3D-View 233

AAbsolute Dimensioning 17Absolute Dimensions

Activate 61De-Activate 62

AddressesAlternative Addresses 27Combined Addresses 27Optional Addresses 27Table of Addresses 315

Alternative Solutions with Contour StringsSee Contour Strings: 142

Angle CriterionSee Contour Strings: 152

Angle Criterion with Contour StringsSee Contour Strings: 142

Arc as a Contour SegmentSee Contour Strings: 142

Arc CriterionSee Contour Strings: 154

Arc Criterion with Contour StringsSee Contour Strings: 142

BBar feed for work parts in the main spindle 246Basic Geometry 13Basics of NC Programming 25Blank 219

CCancel Incremental Zero Shift 60Centre Sleeve

Lock/Unlock 29Chamfer between Segments - See Contour Strings:

159Chamfering between Axially Parallel Straight Lines

Radius/Chamfer Cycle 131Chamfering Cycle 131Changes and Supplements to the Version 5.x

Change of Address Letter 11Change of G-Commands 11

Chord Surface 302Chucking Depth 224Circle Interpolation: 36Circular Interpolation

Clockwise 36Clamping Devices 222Clamping Mode 223Clearance Cutting Cycle

G78 in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F81

G85 in Compliance with DIN 509 Types E and F117

Clearance Cutting Cycle: 81; 117

Code (Number)See NC Block: 25

Commands 26Modal and Non-modal 26

Compensation Values 230Compensation Value Storage 21Length Compensation 21

ConfigurationCounter Spindle 237Driven Tools 251

Constant Cutting SpeedSee Cutting Speed: 66

Contour SegmentsSee Contour Strings: 142

Contour StringThree-Point String

Arc - Arc 183Contour Strings 142

Arc Segment 144Chamfer between Two Lines 159Circle Centres Absolute 147Four-Point String

with Tangential Transitions 188Line Segment 144Open Contour Strings 194Pointed Tangential Transitions 150Rounding between Two Entities 157Selection of Solutions 151

Arc Criterion 154Selection of Solutions - Angle Criterion 152Selection of Solutions - Line Criterion 153Selection of Solutions with Roundings 157Tangential Connection to Preceding Entity 201Tangential Transitions 148Three-Point String

Arc - Line 170Line - Arc 176Line - Line 166

Two-Point StringStraight Line 160

Contouring CycleContouring/Multipass Cycle 111Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour 98Recessing Cycle for any Contour 124Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour 88

CoolantActivate/Deactivate 28

Coordinate System 13; 60Cartesian Coordinate System 13for CNC-Turning 13Origin of the Coordinate System 13Polar Coordinate System 13Shift Coordinate System

See Workpiece Zero: 59Two-dimensional Coordinate System 13

Coordinates 13Core Diameter of Threads

See Thread: 69

Index

© MTS GmbH 1998 319

Counter Spindle 235Configuration 237G00 Rapid Speed Movement 241G01 Travel Movement 242G05 Bar feed 246G28 Machining on the Counter Spindle 244G29 Machining Transfer to the Main Spindle 238G30 Work Part Transfer 239G59 Shift of the Reference Point 240Machining states 236Programming the Counter Spindle 238Setup Data 225

Current Tool 226Cutting Speed

Constant Cutting Speed 66Cycles 67

Table of Available Cycles 67

DDeep Drilling Cycle

See Drilling Cycle : 115Define Workpiece Zero - Incremental 59Define/Shift Zero

See Workpiece Zero: 57Description of a Final Contour 55DIN 66025 31Drilling Cycle

Deep Drilling Cycle G84 115Driven Tools 247

Chord Surface G19 302Configuration 251Free-definable Plane G16 254Front Face G17 273Machining Cycles 249Machining planes 248Multiple Cycles 249Setup Data 227Shell Surface G18 287Standard Plane G15 253Turning Plane G14 252

Dwell 38

EEnd Block Number in Subprograms

See Subprograms: 43End Block Number of Repeated Program Parts

See Repeated Program Parts: 44External Diameter of Threads

See Thread: 69

FFeedrate 29

Millimeters per Minute 64Millimeters per Revolution 65

Final Contour 55Finishing Allowance 73Four-Point String

See Contour Strings: 142Free-definable Plane 254Front Face 273

IIncremental Dimensioning 17Incremental Dimensions

Activate 62De-Activate 61

Incremental Zero ShiftSee Workpiece Zero: 59

JJump Instruction - unconditional 45

LLead 50Length Compensation

See Compensation Values: 21Limitation of the Travel Range

See Travel Range Limitation: 113Line as a Contour Segment

See Contour Strings: 142Line Criterion

See Contour Strings: 153Line Criterion with Contour Strings

See Contour Strings: 142Linear Interpolation in Slow Feed Motion G01 35

MMachine Zero 15; 57Machining Cycles 249Machining planes 248Machining states 236Material 221Measuring Unit

Millimeters (mm), Switch to 41M-Functions 28Millimeters (mm), Switch to 41Miscellaneous Functions 28Modal Commands 26Motion, Rapid 33Multiple Cycles 249

NNC Block 25

Addresses 25Code 25Format 25Skipping of NC blocks 207Value 25Word 25

NC Program Analysis 231N-polygon 219

OOpen Contour Strings

See Contour Strings: 142Optional Block Skip 43

PParameter 205Planes



Chord Surface G19 302Free-definable Plane G16 254Front Face G17 273Shell Surface G18 287Standard Plane G15 253Turning Plane G14 252

Pointed Tangential Transitions 150Polar Coordinate System

See Coordinate System: 13Prefabricated Part 221Program End 29Programmed Halt 28Programming the Spindle Speed 29Programming with Parameter 205Programming with Special Characters 207

RRadiusing Cycle 131Rapid Traverse 33Recessing Cycle

G79 Recessing Cycle with chamfers, roundingsand bevelled sides: 87

G86 Recessing Cycle for rectangular recesses:123

G87 Recessing Cycle for any Contour 124Recessing Cycle G86 123Reference Point 15

Move to the Reference Point 46Reference Points 15Relative Dimensioning 17Repeated Program Parts 44

End Block Number 44Start Block Number 44

Repetition of a Program PartSee Repeated Program Parts: 44

Roughing CycleContouring/Multipass Cycle 111Cross Roughing Cycle / Rectangular Contour 79Cross Roughing Cycle for any Contour 98Straight Roughing Cycle for any Contour 88Straight Roughing Cycle- Rectangular Contour 77Straight/Plane Roughing Cycle- Conical Contour

135Rounding Between Contour Entities - See Contour

Strings: 157Roundings between Axially Parallel Straight Lines

Radius/Chamfer Cycle 131

SScreen Layout in CNC Simulator 6 10Segment Contour Programming

See Contour Strings: 142Selection of Solutions

See Contour Strings: 151Selection of Solutions with Pointed Tangents 155Setup Form

Beginning/End Indicator 218Blank 219Chucking Depth 224Clamping Devices 222Clamping Mode 223

Compensation Values 230Counter Spindle 225Current Tool 226Driven Tools 227Prefabricated Part 221Syntax 217Tailstock/Sleeve 224Tools in the Turret 226Workpiece Material 221

Shell Surface 287Skipping of NC blocks 207Special Characters 207Spindle

Activate/Deactivate 28Spindle Speed 29Spindle Speed Limitation 63Standard Plane 253Start Block Number in Subprograms

See Subprograms: 43Start Block Number of Repeated Program Parts

See Repeated Program Parts: 44Subprograms

End 43End Block Number 43Invocation 43Start Block Number 43

Subprograms: 43Switching Functions 28

TTable of available DIN commands 31Tailstock 48Tailstock/Sleeve 224Tangential Transition with Contour Strings

See Contour Strings: 142Tangential Transitions 148Tangents, Pointed 155Thread 50; 69

Core Diameter 69Cylinder Thread 50; 69Depth 69External Diameter 69Lead 69Taper Thread 50; 69

Thread Undercut G78 in Compliance with DIN 7685

Thread Undercut G85 in Compliance with DIN 76121

Threading Cycle G31 69Threading Cycle G33 50Three-Point String

See Contour Strings: 142Tool Change 30Tool Changing Position 15Tool Compensation Storage

See Compensation Values: 21Tool Compensation Values

See Compensation Values: 21Tool Geometry 19Tool Nose

adjustable angle 19Angle of Reversible Tip 19

Index

© MTS GmbH 1998 321

Clearance Angle 19Infeed Angle 19Lenght of Tool Nose 19Theoretical Cutting Point 21Tool Nose Compensation Value 21Tool Nose Geometry 19Tool Nose Radius 19; 21Width of Tool Nose 19

Tool Nose Compensation 23; 52Cancel 52Left/Right of the Contour 52

Tool Nose Radius 23Tool Nose Radius Compensation 23Tool Reference Point 15; 21Tool Shank

Diameter 19Minimum Diameter 19

Tool Shank: 19Tool-Changing Position

Move to the Tool-Changing Position 47Tooling Quadrants 23Tools

Compensation Values 230

Current Tool 226Setup Data Driven Tools 227Tools in the Turret 226

Travel Range Limitation 113Turning Plane 252Turret

Tools in the Turret 226Two-Point String

See Contour Strings: 142

VValue

See NC Block: 25

WWords

See NC Block: 25Workpiece Material 221Workpiece Zero 15; 57

Define - Absolute 57Zero Shift 59

turning programming manual

Documents